Owners Manual
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Gasoline
UNLEADED gasoline
Fuel Tank Capacity
18.49 gal. (70 liters)
Recommended Engine Oil
API Service SM,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
Engine Oil Capacity with Filter
Engine : 4.86 qts. (4.6 liters)
Engine Coolant
2.0L Engine : 6.87 ~ 6.97 qts.
(6.5 ~ 6.6 liters)
2.4L Engine : 7.18 qts. (6.8 liters)
Tire Pressure (measured cold)
P205/65R16 94H : 33 psi
P215/55R17 93V : 33 psi
225/45R18 95V : 35 psi
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV, KIA genuine ATF SP-IV
or other brands meeting the above specification approved by KIA MOTORS CORP
Capacity - 2.0L Engine : 8.24 qts. (7.8 liters)
2.4L Engine : 7.50 qts. (7.1 liters)
Manual Transaxle Fluid
API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)
or other brands meeting the GL-4 specitication approved by KIA Motors Corp.
Capacity - 2.4L Engine : 1.9 qts. (1.8 liters)
Brake Fluid
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
kia, the company
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality, value
for money prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a
customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all Kia models and includes descriptions and
explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to
your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
Foreword
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement
parts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
i
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2011 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in
whole or in part without the written consent of Kia MOTORS
AMERICA, Inc.
Printed in U.S.A
table of contents
Introduction
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Features of your vehicle
4
Driving your vehicle
5
What to do in an emergency
6
Maintenance
7
Specifications, Consumer information,
Reporting safety defects
8
Index
I
ii
Introduction
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-3
Vehicle break-in process / 1-4
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-5
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-6
1
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under various road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. Use the
index when looking for a specific area or
subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all
located in the back of this manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various types of safety
instructions in this manual. These
instructions were prepared to enhance
your personal safety. Carefully read and
follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these instructions.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.
1 2
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than what
has been specified. (Consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.)
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off. Attempts
to force more fuel into the tank
can cause fuel overflow onto you
and the ground causing a risk of
fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
✽ NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks one time,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator
light will illuminate.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems
may not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and is manufactured
exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel
Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with
your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in
poor engine performance and damage to
your vehicle's engine and fuel system.
Kia recommends that customers do not
use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10 percent.
✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel system
or any performance problems caused by
the use of “E85” fuel.
1 3
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of
the fuel system.
✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel system
and any performance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels containing
methanol.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline, which helps prevent deposit
formation in the engine. These gasolines
will help the engine run cleaner and
enhance performance of the Emission
Control System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please
go to the website (www.toptiergas.com).
For Customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, and
have problems starting or the engine
does not run smoothly, additives that you
can buy separately may be added to the
gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline is not available, one bottle of
additive added to the fuel tank at 7,500
miles or every engine oil change is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.
1 4
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200
miles (2,000 km) of operation.
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data
as:
* How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/
fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your
vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
1 5
Introduction
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Air bag warning light
Charging system warning light
ESC indicator
ABS warning light
Trunk open warning light
ESC OFF indicator
Seat belt warning light
Door open warning light
Electric power steering (EPS)
system warning light*
Turn signal indicator
Immobilizer indicator*
High beam indicator
KEY
OUT
Key out warning light*
Low beam indicator
Shift pattern indicator*
Tail light indicator
Manual transaxle shift indicator*
Front fog light indicator*
Low fuel level warning light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Malfunction indicator light
Parking brake & Brake fluid
warning light
Engine coolant temperature
warning light*
❈ For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.
1 6
ECO ECOMINDER® indicator*
Low tire pressure telltale* /
TPMS malfunction indicator*
CRUISE Cruise control indicator*
Cruise SET indicator*
* : if equipped
Your vehicle at a glance
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Engine compartment / 2-4
2
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Driver position memory system*.......4-34
2. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-14
3. Outside rearview mirror control
switch*...............................................4-46
4. Power window lock button* ...............4-24
5. Power window switches*...................4-21
6. Central door lock switch* ..................4-15
7. Instrument panel illumination control
knob*.................................................4-49
8. ESC OFF button ...............................5-26
9. Steering wheel tilt lever* ...................4-37
10. Hood release lever .........................4-25
11. Fuse box .........................................7-54
12. Brake pedal.....................................5-21
13. Accelerator pedal......................5-9/5-10
14. Trunk lid release lever .....................4-18
15. Fuel filler lid release lever ...............4-27
* : if equipped
OTF010001N
2 2
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Instrument cluster .............................4-49
2. Light control / Turn signals................4-82
3. Wiper/Washer ...................................4-85
4. Horn ..................................................4-37
5. Steering wheel audio control*.........4-120
6. Auto cruise control*...........................5-32
7. Driver’s air bag..................................3-45
8. Steering wheel ..................................4-36
9. Ignition switch* or
ENGINE START/STOP button*.....5-4/5-6
10. Digital clock...................................4-117
11. Hazard ......................................4-75/6-2
12. Audio* ...........................................4-119
13. Climate control system .........4-92/4-101
14. Shift lever................................5-12/5-15
15. Aux, USB and iPod port* ..............4-121
16. Power outlet*.................................4-116
17. Seat warmer* ....................................3-9
18. Passenger’s air bag ........................3-45
19. Glove box ......................................4-113
* : if equipped
OTF010002N
2 3
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ 2.4L Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-23
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-22
3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir ..............7-26
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-29
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-53
■ 2.0L Engine
6. Positive battery terminal ...................7-36
7. Negative battery terminal..................7-36
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-27
9. Radiator cap .....................................7-24
10. Engine oil dipstick ...........................7-22
* : if equipped
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OTF070002/OYF071200N
2 4
Seat / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-17
Child restraint system / 3-27
Airbag-advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-35
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward / backward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Lumbar support
(5) Driver position memory system*
(6) Seat warmer switch*
(7) Headrest
Front passenger’s seat
(8) Seat adjustment, forward / backward
(9) Seatback recliner
(10) Seat warmer switch*
(11) Headrest
Rear seat
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Seat warmer*
Armrest
Headrest
Seat-back folding lever
* : if equipped
OTF030001N
3 2
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Loose objects
Do not place anything in the driver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the driver's
foot area could interfere with the
operation of the foot pedals.
WARNING - Uprighting
WARNING - Driver responsibility for passengers
The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in an
upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion. If a seat is reclined
during an accident, the restraint
system's ability to restrain will be
greatly reduced.
seat
Do not press the release lever on a
manual seatback without holding
and controlling the seatback. The
seatback will spring upright possibly impacting you or other passengers.
WARNING- Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on seat
cushions. The passenger's hips
may slide under the lap portion of
the seat belt during an accident or
a sudden stop.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control of
your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in a serious or fatal injury in a sudden
stop or collision.
• Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable control
of your vehicle. A distance of at
least 10" from your chest to the
steering wheel is recommended.
Failure to do so could result in
airbag inflation injuries to the
driver.
3 3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Seat
WARNING - Unexpected
seat movement
adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while wearing seat belts. Moving the seat
forward will cause strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near the
seat bottom or seat track while
adjusting the seat. Your hand
could get caught in the seat
mechanism.
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front and
back. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
OTF030002
Front seat manual adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up
and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
3 4
Safety features of your vehicle
OTF030003
OTF030004
OTF030005
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Seat Cushion height
(for driver's seat)
To change the height of the seat cushion
push the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, push the
lever up several times.
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion of
the switch to decrease support.
3 5
Safety features of your vehicle
Automatic adjustment (if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by using
the control switch located on the outside
of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust
the seat to the proper position so as to
easily control the steering wheel, pedals
and switches on the instrument panel.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unatteded in the vehicle.
3 6
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is completed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control switches at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
OTF030006
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the switch once the
seat reaches the desired position.
Safety features of your vehicle
OTF030007
OTF030008
OTF030009
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seatback to the desired
angle. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat cushion height (for driver's side)
Pull the front portion of the control switch
up to raise or down to lower the front part
of the seat cushion. Pull the rear portion
of the control switch up to raise or down
to lower the rear part of the seat cushion.
Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch on
the side of the driver's seat. Press the
front portion of the switch to increase
support, or the rear portion of the switch
to decrease support.
3 7
Safety features of your vehicle
For this reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
OMG038400
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps protect the head and neck in
the event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case of an
accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the
same height of the center of gravity of an
occupant's head. Generally, the center of
gravity of most people's head is similar
with the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to your
head as possible.
3 8
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the
headrests
removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest height
while the vehicle is in motion.
Driver may lose control of the
vehicle.
OTF030012
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
4 different positions by pulling the headrest forward to the desired detent. To
adjust the headrest to it’s furthest backwards position, pull it fully forward to the
farthest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
Safety features of your vehicle
OTF030013N
OTF030010
OTF030011
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
OTF030045N
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmers are provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather. With
the ignition switch in the ON position,
push either of the switches to warm the
driver's seat or the front passenger's
seat.
3 9
Safety features of your vehicle
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
→
OFF → HIGH (
3 10
) → LOW (
)
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or
seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could
occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time. The occupants must be able to feel if the
seat is becoming too warm and to
turn the seat warmer off.
In particular, the driver must exercise extreme care for the following
types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
Safety features of your vehicle
• Each time you push the button, the airflow is changed as follows:
→
OFF → HIGH (
OTF030014
Climate control seat (if equipped)
The climate control seat is provided to
cool or warm the seat during hot or cold
weather by blowing air through small vent
holes on the surface of the seat and seatback. While the engine is running, push
the rear portion of the switch to cool the
seat, and push the front portion of the
switch to warm the seat.
When the operation of the climate control
seat is not needed, keep the switch in the
OFF position.
The climate control seat defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
) → LOW (
)
CAUTION
• The climate control seat is a supplementary cooling/heating system. Use the climate control seat
when the climate control system
is on. Using the climate control
seat for prolonged periods of time
with the climate control system
off could cause the climate control seat performance to impair.
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the seats.
• Do not spill liquid such as water
or beverages on the surface of
the front seats and seatbacks, or
the air vent holes may be blocked
and prevented from working
properly.
• Do not place materials such as
plastic bags or newspapers under
the seats. The air vent may not
work properly as the air intake
can be blocked.
• When the air vent does not operate, restart the vehicle. If there is
no change, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
3 11
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Seatback
pocket
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pocket. An occupant could contact such objects in
a crash. Heavy objects in the front
passenger seatback could also
interfere with the airbag sensing
system.
HNF2041-1
OTF030016
Active headrest
The active headrest is designed to move
forward and upward during a rear impact.
This helps to prevent the driver's and
front passenger's heads from moving
backward and thus helps minimize neck
injuries.
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s seatback.
3 12
Safety features of your vehicle
Also adjust the headrest as close to your
head as possible. For this reason, the
use of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not recommended.
OMG038401
Rear seat adjustment
Headrest
The rear seat is equipped with headrests
in all the seating positions for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps protect the
head and neck in the event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case of an
accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the
same height of the center of gravity of an
occupant's head. Generally, the center of
gravity of most people's head is similar
with the height as the top of their eyes.
OTF030017
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
3 13
Safety features of your vehicle
OTF030018
OTF030025
OTF030023N
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling the headrest upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height and ensure that
it locks in position.
Make sure the headrest locks in position
after adjusting.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
rear seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward from
the seatback.
✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
3 14
Safety features of your vehicle
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
WARNING
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the vehicle is moving. This is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop.
WARNING - Objects
To fold the rear seatback
1. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary slide the
front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear headrest to the lowest
position.
3. Open the trunk.
OTF030020
4. Pull the lock release lever (1) and fold
the rear seatback forward and down
firmly.
If the seat belt locks after unfolding the
rear seatback, pull out the locked seat
belt, release it then pull it out again.
Objects carried on the folded down
seatback should not extend higher
than the top of the front seatbacks.
This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage
during sudden stops.
3 15
Safety features of your vehicle
To unfold the rear seat
1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward. Pull the seatback
firmly until it clicks into place. Make
sure the seatback is locked in place.
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pushing on the
top of the seatback.
If you can not see the red line at the
bottom of folding lever, it means the
seatback is locked completely.
2. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
3. When the seatback is completely
installed, check the seatback folding
lever again.
When returning the rear seatbacks to the
upright position, remember to return the
rear shoulder belts to their proper position.
3 16
WARNING - Rear seatback
When returning the rear seatback
from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it
slowly. Ensure that the seatback is
completely locked into its upright
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move forward
with great force and enter the passenger compartment.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place heavy objects in the
rear seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a frontal collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the
bony structure of the body, and should be
worn low across the pelvis, chest and
shoulders as applicable. wearing the lap
section of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly
as possible, consistent with comfort, to
provide the protection for which they
have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils
and chemicals, and particularly battery
acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water. The belt
should be replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged.
• For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always be
used whenever the vehicle is moving.
A properly positioned shoulder belt
should be positioned midway over your
shoulder across your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. See child restraint
system section for further discussion.
WARNING - Shoulder belt
Never wear the shoulder belt under
your arm or behind your back. An
improperly positioned shoulder
belt cannot protect the occupant in
a crash.
WARNING - Seat belt
buckle
Do not allow foreign material (gum,
crumbs, coins, etc.) to obstruct the
seat belt buckle. This may prevent
the seat belt from fastening securely.
WARNING - Damaged seat
belt
Replace the entire seat belt assembly if any part of the webbing or
hardware is damaged as you can
no longer be sure that a damaged
seat belt will provide protection in a
crash.
WARNING - Twisted seat
belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted seat
belt may not properly protect you in
an accident and could even cut into
your body.
3 17
Safety features of your vehicle
Conditions
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Unbuckled
1GQA2083
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light and
chime will activate to the following table
when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.
Unbuckled
ChimeSound
Light-Blink
6 seconds
Buckled
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Warning Pattern
6 seconds
None
Below 3 mph
6 seconds
(5 km/h)
None
3 mph~
6 mph
6 seconds
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 seconds *1
↓
↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
Stop *2
*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop
within 6 seconds and chime will stop
immediately.
*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
3 18
OTF030046N
Seat belt warning (for front passenger’s seat)
The front passenger's seat belt warning
light will activate to the following table
when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.
Safety features of your vehicle
Conditions
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Unbuckled
6 seconds
Above 6mph
Unbuckled
(10 km/h)
Continuously
Buckled
6 seconds
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Buckled →
Unbuckled Below 6mph
(10 km/h)
If you are unable to pull out the seat belt
from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out
and release it. Then you will be able to
pull the belt out smoothly.
Warning Pattern
Continuously *1
None
*1 The seat belt warning light will go off if
the vehicle speed decreases below 3
mph (5 km/h). If the vehicle speed
increases above 3 mph (5 km/h), the
warning light will blink again.
• You can find the front passenger's seat
belt warning light on the center fascia
panel.
• Although the front passenger seat is
not occupied, the seat belt warning
light will blink for 6 seconds.
• The seat belt warning light can blink
when a briefcase or purse is placed on
the front passenger seat.
B180A01NF-1
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
3 19
Safety features of your vehicle
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
OMG035038
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for
maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck. The
shoulder portion should be adjusted so
that it lies across your chest and midway
over your shoulder nearest the door and
not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
3 20
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after being
in an accident. Failure to replace
seat belts after an accident could
leave you with damaged seat belts
that will not provide protection in
the event of another collision.
B200A01NF
You should place the lap belt portion as
low as possible and snugly across your
hips. If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the chance of
injury in the event of a collision.
The arm closest to the seat belt buckle
should be over the belt while the other
arm should be under the belt as shown in
the illustration.
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belts - Front passenger and rear
seat 3-point system with combination
locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt
Combination retractor type seat belts are
installed in the rear seat positions to help
accommodate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front
passenger seat position, it is strongly
recommended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER place an
infant restraint system in the front seat of
the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat
belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab into the buckle. There will
be an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle. When not securing a
child restraint, the seat belt operates in
the same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended from
the retractor to allow the installation of a
child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract,
but not to extend (Automatic Locking
Retractor Type). Refer to “Using a child
restraint system” in this section.
To convert from the automatic locking
feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt
to fully retract.
OBH038023N
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
3 21
Safety features of your vehicle
B210A01NF-1
To release the seat belt
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) of the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
3 22
OMG035300
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions (or side collisions). The
pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated
in crashes, where the frontal collision is
severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
Safety features of your vehicle
Both the driver's and front passenger's
pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated
in certain frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioners will not be activated if
the seat belts are not being worn at the
time of the collision.
✽ NOTICE
1KMB3311A
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly
When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
WARNING - Skin irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which
the pre-tensioner seat belts were
activated. The fine dust from the
pre-tensioner activation may cause
skin irritation and should not be
breathed for prolonged periods.
Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pretensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light ( ) on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the ON position, and then
it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner seat belt does not
work properly, this warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag has not
malfunctioned. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven,
please have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt or
SRS air bag system as soon as possible.
3 23
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Do not attempt to service or repair the
pre-tensioner seat belt system in any
manner. Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat belts
yourself. This must be done by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Seat belt precautions
WARNING - Hot pre
tensioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt
mechanism fires during a collision
the pre-tensioner becomes hot and
can burn you.
Pre-tensioners are designed to operate
only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. If the
pre-tensioner must be replaced, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
3 24
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint laws.You
should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. Child and/or infant
seats must be properly placed and
installed in the rear seat. For more information about the use of these restraints,
refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
Safety features of your vehicle
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened snug on the hips and as low
as possible. Periodically check belt fit. A
child's squirming could put the belt out of
position. Children are given the most
safety in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat. If a larger child
(over age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder
belt and the seat should be placed in the
rearmost position. Children age 12 and
under should be restrained securely in
the rear seat. NEVER place a child age
12 and under in the front seat. NEVER
place a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
WARNING - Small children
Do not allow small children to ride
in the vehicle without an appropriate child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible
according to specific recommendations
by their doctors. The lap portion of the
belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND
LOW AS POSSIBLE on the hips, not
across the abdomen.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the seat belt
above or on the abdomen where
the fetus is located. The force of the
seat belt during a collision will
crush the fetus.
3 25
Safety features of your vehicle
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system,
all passengers should be sitting up and
the front seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving. A
seat belt cannot provide proper protection
if the person is lying down in the rear seat
or if the front seat is in a reclined position.
3 26
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind.
Any damaged parts should be replaced
as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized Kia dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children who are not in
a child restraint should use one of the
seat belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child and/or
infant safety seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. You
must use a commercially available child
restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by seat belt, or by
a tether anchor and/or LATCH anchors (if
equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING- Restraint
location
Never install a child or infant seat
on the front passenger's seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by
an inflating airbag.
WARNING- Hot child
restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day. Be
sure to check the seat cover, buckles and latches before placing a
child in the restraint system.
When the child restraint system is not in
use, store it in the luggage area or fasten
it with a seat belt so that it will not be
thrown forward in case of a sudden stop
or an accident.
3 27
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear- facing child restraint system
WARNING - Holding
children
Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint system
which is appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
WARNING - Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time. This
will eliminate any safety benefit
provided by the seat belt to the
occupants.
CRS09
Forward-facing child restraint system
OTQ037038
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
3 28
Safety features of your vehicle
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and only
lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock mode), you must
manually change these seat belts to the
auto lock mode to secure a child
restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this section, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• Always follow the instructions
provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer. Child
restraint system manufacturers
know their products best.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the instructions provided with the child
restraint system could result in
the improper installation of the
child restraint system which may
reduce the protection to your
child in a crash or a sudden stop.
E2MS103005
placing a passenger seat belt into the
auto lock mode
The auto lock mode will help prevent the
normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen
and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system,
use the following procedure.
3 29
Safety features of your vehicle
OEN036101
OEN036102
OEN036103
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat
belt all the way out. When the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the “Auto
Lock” (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the seat belt to retract and listen for an
audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.
This indicates that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinct
sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
3 30
Safety features of your vehicle
Therefore, the preceding seven steps
must be followed each time a child
restraint is installed.
To remove the child restraint, press the
release button on the buckle and then
pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the
restraint and allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
OEN036104
5. Remove as much slack from the belt
as possible by pushing down on the
child restraint system while feeding the
shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt is
holding it firmly in place. If it is not,
release the seat belt and repeat steps
2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to
pull more of the seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode.
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock mode”
whenever the belt is allowed to retract
fully.
Set the retractor to Automatic Lock
mode when installing any child
restraint system.
If the retractor is not in the Auto
Lock mode, the child restraint can
move when your vehicle turns or
stops suddenly.
OTF030029N
Securing a child restraint seat with
tether anchorage system
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the package tray.
3 31
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the child restraint
seat.
WARNING - Tether strap
OTF030030N
1. Route the child restraint seat tether
strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrests,
route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
3 32
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break.
Check that the child restraint system is
secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.
B230D01NF
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers make
child restraint seats that are labeled as
LATCH or LATCH-compatible child
restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children". These
seats include two rigid or webbing
mounted attachments that connect to
two LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the need to
use seat belts to attach the child seat in
the rear seats.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Unused rear
seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts behind
the child restraint seat when they
are not used to secure the child
seat. Failure to do so may result in
child strangulation.
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Lower Anchor
OTF030031N
OTD039037N
Child restraint symbols are located on
the left and right rear seat backs to indicate the position of the lower anchors for
child restraints.
LATCH anchors have been provided in
your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are
located in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There is no
LATCH anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located between
the seatback and the seat cushion of the
rear seat left and right outboard seating
positions.
When you install your child's restraint
system using the LATCH anchors buckle
the shoulder lap belt, then lock the
retractor and pull the belt to remove the
slack in the belt so it lies flat against the
vehicle seat.
3 33
Safety features of your vehicle
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or LATCHcompatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH child
restraint, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the LATCH and tether
anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat before
you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from
side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold
the seat in place.
3 34
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
Never attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center seating
position. LATCH lower anchors are
only to be used with the left and
right rear outboard seating positions.
You may damage the
anchors or the anchors may fail
and break in a collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
Side impact air bag
Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you and
your passengers must always wear the
safety belts provided in order to minimize
the risk and severity of injury in the event
of a collision or rollover.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYF039050
3 35
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
the appropriate position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side impact air bag or
curtain air bag) in order to help protect
the occupants from serious physical
injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of complex factors including
vehicle speed, angles of impact and
the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits
in the collision. Though, factors are not
limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
3 36
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of extremely
short time in which a collision occurs
and the need to get the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or lifethreatening injuries in a severe collision
and is thus a necessary part of air bag
design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steering wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest to both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after the impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are nontoxic,They may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes,nose and throat, etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult a doctor if the
symptom persists.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
WARNING - Air bag
- Hot components
deployment
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components immediately after airbag inflation. The air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the
roof rails above the front and rear
doors are very hot. Hot components can result in burn injuries.
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, install the child restraint
system as far away from the door
side as possible. Inflation of the
side and/or curtain air bags could
impact the child.
1JBH3051
Installing a child restraint on a front
passenger’s seat is forbidden
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
3 37
Safety features of your vehicle
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt buckle sensors
13. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly
*: if equipped
W7-147
OTF032049N
Air bag warning light
SRS components and functions
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the indicator light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
The SRS consists of the following components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator (Front passenger’s seat only)
11. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
3 38
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require air
bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
air bag warning light should go out.
If any of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.
Have an authorized Kia dealer inspect
the air bag system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag (1)
Driver’s front air bag (2)
Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B01L
B240B02L
B240B03L
The air bag modules are located both in
the center of the steering wheel and in
the front passenger's panel above the
glove box. When the SRSCM detects a
sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other controls.
3 39
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Passenger’s front air bag
Before you replace a fuse or disconnect
a battery terminal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position and
remove the ignition key. Never remove
or replace the air bag related fuse(s)
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warning light
to illuminate.
B240B05L
OTF030047N
Occupant detection system
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any accessories on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, or on the front
passenger's panel above the glove
box in a vehicle Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles if
the air bag deploys.
3 40
Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air bag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The driver's front air bag is not affected
or controlled by the occupant detection
system.
Safety features of your vehicle
Main components of occupant detection system
• A detection device located within the
front passenger seat track.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag systems
should be activated or deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the
words PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicating the front passenger air bag
system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning
light is interconnected with the occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by
a person that the system determines to
be of adult size, and he/she sits properly
(sitting upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the seat
cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the
floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator will turn off and the front passenger's air bag will be able to inflate, if
necessary, in frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator on the center facia panel.
This system detects the conditions 1~4
in the following table and activates or
deactivates the front passenger air bag
based on these conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and
wearing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air bag
and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection System)
may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can defeat the
detection system. These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front
of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or resting them on other locations which
reduce the passenger weight on the
front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
3 41
Safety features of your vehicle
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system
Indicator/Warning light
Condition detected by the occupant
detection system
Devices
PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator light
SRS warning
light
Front passenger
air bag
Off
Off
Activated
On
Off
Deactivated
3. Unoccupied
On
Off
Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system
Off
On
Activated
1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2
2. Infant or child restraint system
with 12 months old*3 *4
*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending
on his/her physique and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than
the same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above
12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front
passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
3 42
WARNING - ODS system
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the occupant
detection system (ODS) and may
result in the deactivation of front
passenger airbag. It is important for
the driver to instruct the passenger
as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
B990A08O
1KMN3663
1KMN3665
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat.
- Never sit with the hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never place the feet on the dashboard.
OVQ036014N
1KMN3662
1KMN3664
- Never place the feet on the front
passenger seatback.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
- Never lean on the door or center
console.
- Never sit on one side of the front
passenger seat.
3 43
Safety features of your vehicle
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is still on, ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat.
WARNING - “AIR BAG
OFF” light
B990A01O
When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask
the passenger to sit properly (sitting
upright with the seat back in an upright
position, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor).
Restart the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow the
system to detect the person and to
enable the passenger air bag.
3 44
Do not allow an adult passenger to
ride in the front seat when the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
is illuminated, because the air bag
will not deploy in the event of a
crash. The driver must instruct the
passenger to reposition himself in
the seat. Failure to properly position yourself may lead to airbag
deactivation resulting in airbag
non-deployment and in a collision.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator remains illuminated after
the passenger repositions themselves properly and the car is
restarted, it is recommended that
passenger move to the rear seat
because the passenger's front air
bag will not deploy.
✽ NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position or after the engine is
started. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant detection sensor
will then classify the front passenger
after several more seconds.
Safety features of your vehicle
Any child age 12 and under should ride
in the rear seat. Children too large for
child restraints should use the available
lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type
of crash, children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
✽ NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or
attach anything such as a blanket, front
seat covers or after market seat heater
to the front passenger seat. This can
adversely affect the occupant detection
system.
If the occupant detection system is not
working properly, the SRS air bag warning light
on the instrument panel will
illuminate because the passenger's front
air bag is connected with the occupant
detection system. If there is a malfunction of the occupant detection system,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's
front air bag will inflate in frontal impact
crashes even if there is no occupant in
the front passenger's seat.
Driver’s front air bag
OTF030033
Passenger’s front air bag
OTF030034
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint (Air
Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at
both the driver and passenger seating
position.
3 45
Safety features of your vehicle
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on
the air bag pad cover in the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the air bag inflation with two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage
level is provided for more severe impacts.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver's seat
position, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity.
The passenger’s front air bag is designed
to help reduce the injury of children sitting close to the instrument panel in low
speed collisions. However, children are
safer if they are restraint in the rear seat.
3 46
According to the impact severity, seating
position and seat belt usage, the SRSCM
(SRS Control Module) controls the air
bag inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat. The occupant
detection system detects the presence of
a passenger in the front passenger's seat
and will turn off the front passenger's air
bag under certain conditions. For more
detail, see "Occupant detection system"
in this section.
Do not place any objects that may cause
magnetic fields near the front seat. These
may cause a malfunction of the seat
track position sensor.
Safety features of your vehicle
Manufacturers are required by government regulations to provide a contact
point concerning modifications to the
vehicle for persons with disabilities,
which modifications may affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag system. That contact is Kia’s toll-free Customer
Assistance center at 1-800-333-4KIA.
However, Kia does not endorse nor will it
support any changes to any part or structure of the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including the
occupant detection system.
WARNING - Replacement/
modifications
Advanced air bags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide
enhanced occupant protection in frontal
crashes. Front air bags are not intended
to deploy in collisions in which sufficient
protection can be provided by the pretensioner seat belt alone.
Front air bags are not intended to deploy
in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover
crashes. In addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below the
deployment threshold.
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components of
the SRS system. Doing so could
result in injury, due to accidental
deployment of the air bags or by
rendering the SRS inoperative.
The front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be
replaced except by an authorized
Kia dealer using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replacement
or modification could adversely
affect the operation of the occupant
detection
system
and
your
advanced air bags.
3 47
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear impact
The purpose of the air bag is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
The side impact air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The
side air bags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations.
Front
1JBB3520
OTD039022
Side impact
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the ignition
switch is ON to prevent unexpected
deployment of the side impact air
bag.
1JBA3514
Rollover
1LDA2056
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Side impact air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat.
1JBA3522
3 48
Safety features of your vehicle
The side impact air bag is supplemental
to the driver's and the passenger's seat
belt systems and is not a substitute for
them. Therefore your seat belts must be
worn at all times while the vehicle is in
operation.
For best protection from the side air bag
system and to avoid being injured by the
deploying side air bag, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened.
The driver's hands should be placed on
the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00
positions. The passenger's arms and
hands should be placed on their laps.
If seat or seat cover is damaged, have
the vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. Inform that your
vehicle is equipped with side impact air
bags and an occupant detection system.
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat. Such
objects may become dangerous
projectiles if the side airbag
inflates.
OTF030037-1
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the side
or near the side impact air bag as
this may affect the deployment of
the side air bags.
OTF030038
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
3 49
Safety features of your vehicle
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in all
side impact situations, collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in most
rollover situations.
Do not allow the passengers to lean their
heads or bodies onto doors, put their
arms on the doors, stretch their arms out
of the window, or place objects between
the doors and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
3 50
✽ NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any components of the side curtain air bag system.
This should only be done by an authorized Kia dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts. In other words, just because
your vehicle is damaged and even if it
is totally unusable, don’t be surprised
that the air bags did not inflate.
1
2
3
3
OTF032039N/OTF030040/OTF030041/OMG035053/OTF030048N
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
3 51
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Air bag
sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bag or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer.
3 52
Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are changed due to the
deformation of the front bumper, body or
B pillar where side collision sensors are
installed. Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.
Installing aftermarket bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-genuine
parts may adversely affect your vehicle’s
collision and air bag deployment performance.
1JBA3513
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
1JBA3516
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate in frontal collisions, they also
may inflate in other types of collisions if
the front impact sensors detect a sufficient frontal force in another type of
impact. Side impact and curtain air bags
are designed to inflate in certain side
impact collisions. They may inflate in
other type of collisions where a side force
is detected by the sensors.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
1JBA3515
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
OUN026090
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Side air bags
Side air bags (side impact and/or curtain
air bags) are designed to inflate when an
impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
3 53
Safety features of your vehicle
OED036100
1JBA3516
1JBA3521
• Air bags are not designed to inflate in
rear collisions, because occupants are
moved backward by the force of the
impact. In this case, inflated air bags
would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.
• In a slant or angled collision, the force
of impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
3 54
Safety features of your vehicle
1JBA3517
1JBA3522
1JBA3518
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be significantly replaced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags do not inflate in all rollover
accidents, even though the vehicle is
equipped with side impact air bags and
curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.
3 55
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel must be performed by an authorized Kia dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use
only a soft, dry cloth or one which has
been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
3 56
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components of
the SRS system. Doing so could
result in the accidental inflation of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
If components of the air bag system must
be discarded, or if the vehicle must be
scrapped, certain safety precautions
must be observed. An authorized Kia
dealer knows these precautions and can
give you the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precautions and
procedures could increase the risk of
personal injury.
Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
Safety features of your vehicle
OTF030043-1
OTF030044-1
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required by
the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.
3 57
Keys / 4-2
Smart key / 4-3
Remote keyless entry / 4-5
Theft-alarm system / 4-10
Door locks / 4-13
Trunk / 4-18
Windows / 4-21
Hood / 4-25
Fuel filler lid / 4-27
Sunroof / 4-30
Features of your vehicle
Driver position memory system / 4-34
Steering wheel / 4-36
Mirrors / 4-39
Instrument cluster / 4-49
Hazard warning flasher / 4-75
Rearview camera / 4-79
Welcome system / 4-80
Lighting / 4-81
Wipers and washers / 4-85
Interior light / 4-88
Defroster / 4-91
Manual climate control system / 4-92
Automatic climate control system / 4-101
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-109
Storage compartment / 4-113
Interior features / 4-115
Audio system / 4-119
4
Features of your vehicle
KEYS
■ Type B
■ Type A
OFD047001
OFD047002-A/OED036001A
Record your key number
Key operations
The key code number is stamped on the
bar code tag attached to the key set.
Should you lose your keys, this number
will enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove the bar
code tag and store it in a safe place. Also,
record the code number and keep it in a
safe place (not in the vehicle).
Type A
Used to start the engine, lock and unlock
the doors.
4 2
WARNING - Aftermarket
keys
Use only Kia original parts for the
ignition key in your vehicle. If an
aftermarket key is used, the ignition
switch may not return to ON after
START. If this happens, the starter
will continue to operate causing
possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.
OUB041001N
❈ The actual feature may differ from the illustration.
Type B
To remove the mechanical key, press and
hold the release button and remove the
mechanical key.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a click
sound is heard.
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
Even though you press the button, the
doors will not lock and the chime will
sound for 3 seconds if any of the following occurs:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
• Any door except the trunk is opened.
OTF040003
OTF040008
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door and even start the engine without
inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a smart
key are similar to the remote keyless
entry. (Refer to the “Remote keyless
entry” in this section.)
Locking
Pressing the button of the front outside
door handles with all doors closed and
any door unlocked, locks all the doors.
The hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound once to indicate that
all doors are locked. The button will only
operate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle. If you want to make sure
that a door has locked or not, you should
check the door lock button inside the
vehicle or pull the outside door handle.
Smart key functions
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and
unlock the vehicle doors. Also, you may
start the engine. Refer to the following,
for more details.
4 3
Features of your vehicle
Unlocking
Pressing the button of the driver's outside door handle with all doors closed
and locked, unlocks the driver's door. The
hazard warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound twice to indicate that the
driver's door is unlocked.
Pressing the button in the front passenger's outside door handle with all doors
closed and locked, unlocks all the doors.
The hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound twice to indicate that
all doors are unlocked. The button will
only operate when the smart key is within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the outside
door handle.
Start-up
You can start the engine without inserting
the key. For detailed information refer to
“Starting the engine with a smart key” in
section 5.
4 4
Smart key precautions
• If you lose your smart key, you will not
be able to start the engine. Tow the
vehicle, if necessary, and contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and key to your
authorized Kia dealer to protect it from
potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any of following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- The smart key near a mobile two-way
radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the
mechanical key. If you have a problem
with the smart key, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Transmitter
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not function
properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. If
the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
Features of your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
Also, if the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will
sound once to confirm that the door is
locked.
However, if any door remains open, the
hazard warning lights (and/or the chime)
will not operate. But if all doors are
closed after the lock button is pressed,
the hazard warning lights will blink once.
■ Type A
ONF048011
■ Type B
OTF040002
Remote keyless entry system
operations
✽ NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to exposure to water or liquids, it
will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.
Unlock (2)
The driver's door is unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once. The hazard
warning lights will blink (for smart key, the
chime also sounds) twice to indicate that
the driver's door is unlocked.
All doors are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds. The hazard warning lights will blink
(for smart key, the chime also sounds)
twice again to indicate that all doors are
unlocked. After pressing this button, the
doors will lock automatically unless you
open any door within 30 seconds.
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button is
pressed. If all doors (and trunk) are
closed, the hazard warning lights will
blink once to indicate that all doors (and
trunk) are locked.
4 5
Features of your vehicle
Trunk open (3) (if equipped)
The trunk is opened if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automatically.
Alarm (4)
The horn sounds and the hazard warning
lights blink for about 30 seconds if this
button is pressed for more than 0.5 seconds. To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the transmitter.
4 6
Transmitter precautions
The transmitter (or smart key) will not
work if any of following occurs:
• The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
• You exceed the operating distance limit
(about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The battery in the transmitter (or smart
key) is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter (or smart key) is close
to a radio transmitter such as a radio
station or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter (or smart key) does
not work properly, open and close the
door with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter (or smart
key), contact an authorized Kia dealer.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. If
the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
Features of your vehicle
1. Pry open the transmitter or smart key
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery positive “+” symbol faces up as indicated in the illustration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
■ Type A
OED039003A
■ Type B, C
The transmitter or smart key is designed
to give you years of trouble-free use,
however it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the battery,
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
Using the wrong battery can cause the
transmitter or smart key to malfunction.
Be sure to use the correct battery.
An inappropriately disposed battery can
be harmful to the environment and
human health.
Dispose the battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the keyless entry system transmitter to
heat or sunlight.
OSL040005
Battery replacement
A battery should last for several years,
but if the transmitter or smart key is not
working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one. If you are unsure
how to use or replace the battery, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
4 7
Features of your vehicle
To deactivate the immobilizer system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
OED036001A
Immobilizer system (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key
and electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies that the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
4 8
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
Your Immobilizer password is a customer
unique password and should be kept
confidential. Do not leave this number
anywhere in your vehicle.
Do not put metal accessories near the
ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent the
engine from being started.
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. This may
damage your immobilizer.
✽ NOTICE
Keep each key separately in order to
avoid a starting malfunction.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
4 9
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed stage
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
4 10
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and trunk)
and engine hood are closed and
latched.
3. • Lock the doors by depressing the
door lock button on the transmitter
(or smart key).
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, trunk or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won’t operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. After this, if all doors,
trunk and engine hood are closed,
the hazard warning lights blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the button
of the front outside door handles with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door remains open, the hazard
warning lights won’t operate and
theft-alarm will not arm. Close the
door and try again to lock the doors.
If trunk or engine hood remains open,
the hazard warning lights won’t operate and theft-alarm will not arm.
Close the trunk or engine hood. The
hazard warning lights blink once and
theft-alarm arms.
Features of your vehicle
The theft-alarm system by the key can be
activated by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s)
remains in the vehicle, the alarm may
be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the vehicle. If any
door (or trunk) or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after the
system enters the armed stage, the
system will be disarmed to prevent
unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
Disarmed stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using the transmitter (or smart key).
• The trunk is opened without using the
transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
approximately 27 seconds. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the transmitter (or smart key).
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started. (within 3 seconds)
- The ignition switch is in the “ON” position for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door is
pressed while carrying the smart key.
- The engine is started. (within 3 seconds)
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or trunk) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
4 11
Features of your vehicle
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starting motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the ignition switch, turn the ignition switch to
the ON position and wait for 30 seconds. Then the system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
• If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the ignition switch and start the engine. Then
the system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
4 12
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure the doors are
closed securely.
Unlock
Lock
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
OHD046001
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the front
of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a key,
all vehicle doors will lock/unlock automatically.
• From the driver’s door, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle once to
unlock the driver’s door and once more
within 4 seconds to unlock all doors.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key (or
smart key). (if equipped)
4 13
Features of your vehicle
• If the inner door handle of the front
door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button
will unlock and the door will open. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch (or
if the smart key is in the vehicle) and
any front door is opened. (if equipped)
Lock
Unlock
OTF040011
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on the button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not show.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
4 14
If a power door lock ever fails to function
while you are in the vehicle, try one or
more of the following techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the
door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the key
to unlock the door from outside.
Features of your vehicle
• If the key is in the ignition switch (or if
the smart key is in the vehicle) and any
front door is opened, the doors will not
lock when the “Lock” position (1) of the
central door lock switch is pressed. (if
equipped)
Driver's door
WARNING - Doors
The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehicle
is in motion to prevent accidental
opening of the door.
WARNING
OTF040012N
Passenger’s door
- Unattended children/
animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle.
OTF040013
With central door lock switch
(if equipped)
Operate by pressing the central door lock
switch.
• Press the switch to the "Lock" position
(1), all vehicle doors will lock.
• Press the switch to the "Unlock" position (2), all vehicle doors will unlock.
4 15
Features of your vehicle
Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock when
an impact causes the air bags to deploy.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
(if equipped)
• All doors will automatically lock when
the transaxle shift lever is shifted out of
P (Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the transaxle shift lever is shifted
into P (Park).
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3 mph.
And all doors will be automatically
unlocked when you turn the engine off or
when you remove the ignition key. (if
equipped)
4 16
An authorized Kia dealer can activate or
deactivate some auto door lock/ unlock
features as follows;
• Auto door unlock by using the driver's
door lock button
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting the
transaxle shift lever out of P (Park) or
into P (Park)
• Auto door unlock when the ignition key
is removed from the ignition switch (for
smart key, when the ENGINE
START/STOP button is turned to the
OFF position)
If you want to activate or deactivate some
door lock/unlock feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
OTF040014
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
hole and turn it to the lock ( )position. the child safety lock (1) located on
the rear edge of the door to the lock
position. When the child safety lock is
in the lock position, rear door will not
open even when the inner door handle
is pulled.
Features of your vehicle
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle until the rear door child
safety lock is unlocked.
4 17
Features of your vehicle
TRUNK
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening the trunk.
CAUTION
OTF040016
Opening the trunk
• Press the trunk unlock button for more
than 1 second on the transmitter (or
smart key).
• Press the button on the trunk handle
with the smart key in your possession.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk locks automatically.
4 18
• To open the trunk from inside the vehicle, pull the trunk lid release button.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk locks automatically.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock and
trunk mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
trunk lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the trunk is not closed
prior to driving.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• While driving the vehicle, do not
use emergency trunk lid release.
• If there is a problem with the
trunk, have the vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
OTF040017
Emergency trunk lid release
cable
Closing the trunk
To close, lower the trunk lid, then press
down on it until it locks. To be sure the
trunk lid is securely fastened, always
check by trying to pull it up again.
WARNING
The trunk lid should always be kept
completely closed while the vehicle
is in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases may
enter the car and serious illness or
death may result.
1. Take the cover out by putting the
screwdriver or key at left side and raising cover slightly upward.
2. Pull the hook of cable.
3. After use, securely close the cover.
4 19
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk at any time. The
trunk is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle
is in motion.
OTF040018
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency trunk release lever located inside
the trunk. If someone is inadvertently
locked in the trunk, moving the handle in
the direction of the arrow will release the
trunk latch mechanism and open the
trunk.
4 20
Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window down*
(7) Power window lock button*
*: if equipped
OTF040019N
4 21
Features of your vehicle
In cold and wet climates, power windows
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door’s window. The driver has a power window lock switch which
can block the operation of passenger
windows.
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power windows
cannot be operated even within the 30
second period.
4 22
✽ NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open) position,
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise
is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
OTF040020
Window opening and closing
(if equipped)
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).
Features of your vehicle
OTF040021
OTF040022
OUN026013
Auto down window (if equipped)
(Driver’s window)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the driver’s
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, momentarily pull up the switch
to the opposite direction of the window
movement.
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is released.
To stop the window at the desired position
while the window is in operation, pull up
or press and release the switch to the
opposite direction of the movement.
If the power window is not operated correctly, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue pulling
up on the driver’s power window switch
for at least 1 second after the window is
completely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30
cm) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
4 23
Features of your vehicle
The automatic reverse feature for the driver’s window is only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully pulling
up the switch. The automatic reverse
feature will not operate if the window is
raised using the halfway position on the
power window switch.
CAUTION - Opening /
closing Window
To prevent possible damage to the
power window system, do not open
or close two windows or more at the
same time. This will also ensure the
longevity of the fuse.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
4 24
WARNING - Power
OTF040023
Power window lock button
(if equipped)
• The driver can disable the power window switches on the passenger doors
by pressing the power window lock
switch, located on the driver’s door to
the LOCK position (pressed).
• When the power window lock button
is in the LOCK position (pressed),
the driver’s master control cannot
operate the passenger door power
windows.
windows
Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the driver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(pressed).
Always double check to make sure all
arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before
closing a window.
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
WARNING
OTF040024
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift
lever to the P(Park) position for automatic transaxle and to the 1st(First) gear or
R(Reverse) for manual transaxle, and
setting the parking brake.
OTF040025N
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood raised. The view will be
blocked and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift
the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will raise completely
by itself after it has been raised about
halfway.
4 25
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
4 26
Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks” one time. This indicates that
the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it lightly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
WARNING - Refueling
OTF040026
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pushing up the fuel
filler lid opener.
If the fuel filler lid does not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
OTF040027
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel
filler lid opener up.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).
4. To remove the cap (2), turn the fuel
filler cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting
fuel or if you hear a hissing sound,
wait until the condition stops
before completely removing the
cap.
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can
cover your clothes or skin and subject you to the risk of fire and
burns.
4 27
Features of your vehicle
Always check that the fuel cap is installed
securely to prevent fuel spillage in the
event of an accident.
WARNING - Fire/explosion
risk
Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station facility. Failure
to follow all warnings will result in
severe personal injury, severe
burns or death due to fire or explosion.
4 28
WARNING - Static
electricity
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.
✽ NOTICE
When using an approved portable fuel
container, be sure to place the container
on the ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the container
can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun, contact with
the vehicle should be maintained until
the filling is complete. Use only
approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.
WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling&
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are securely closed, before starting the
engine.
WARNING - Smoking
Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested
in section 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replacement,
use only a genuine Kia cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious
malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel
spilled on painted surfaces may
damage the paint.
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at a
gas station especially during refueling. Automotive fuel is highly
flammable and can, when ignited,
result in fire.
4 29
Features of your vehicle
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may
not work properly due to freezing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that
is on the sunroof before operating it.
CAUTION - Sunroof control
lever
OVG049031
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
Do not continue to press the sunroof control lever after the sunroof
is fully opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the
tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an
open or slide position.
OVG049032
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever backward to the second detent position, the
sunshade will slide all the way open then
the sunroof glass will slide all the way
open. To stop the sunroof movement at
any point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever backward, the sunroof glass will slide all the
way open. To stop the sunroof movement
at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.
4 30
Features of your vehicle
Closing the sunroof
WARNING - Sunroof
To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever forward to
the first detent position or pull the lever
downward.
To close the sunroof glass with the
sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever forward to
the second detent position. The sunroof
glass will close then the sunshade close
automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Do not extend the face, neck, arms
or body outside through the sunroof opening while driving or operating the sunroof.
CAUTION
OYF049215
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof glass or sunshade is
closing automatically, it will reverse the
direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass or sunshade and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be damaged.
4 31
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
If you try to open the sunroof when
the temperature is below freezing or
when the sunroof is covered with
snow or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
OYF049214
OTF040034
Tilting the sunroof
Sunshade
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide all the
way open then the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
• To open the sunshade, pull the sunroof
control lever backward to the first
detent position.
• To close the sunshade when the sunroof glass is closed, push the sunroof
control lever forward.
To stop the sliding at any point, pull or
push the sunroof control lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
4 32
✽ NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on the
blind because of its material characteristic.
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, you must reset your sunroof system as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and close the sunroof completely.
2. Release the control lever.
3. Push and hold the control lever forward
(for more than 10 seconds) until the
sunroof tilts and slightly moves. Then,
release the lever.
4. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close until the sunroof operates as follows:
❈ For more detailed information, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
If the sunroof is not reset when the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or related fuse is blown, the
sunroof may operate improperly.
SUNSHADE OPEN → TILT OPEN →
SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE CLOSE →
SUNSHADE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
4 33
Features of your vehicle
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the driver
position memory system while the
vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
OTF040035
A driver position memory system is provided to store and recall the driver seat
position with a simple button operation.
By saving the desired position into the
system memory, different drivers can
reposition the driver seat based upon
their driving preference. If the battery is
disconnected, the position memory will
be lost and the driving position should be
restored in the system.
4 34
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
ignition switch is ON.
2. Adjust the driver seat to position comfortable for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control panel.
The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or
2) within 5 seconds after pressing the
SET button. The system will beep
twice when memory has been successfully stored.
Features of your vehicle
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
ignition switch is ON.
2. To recall the position in memory, press
the desired memory button (1 or 2).
The system will beep once, then the
driver seat will automatically adjust to
the stored positions.
Adjusting the control switch for the driver
seat while the system is recalling the
stored position will cause the movement
to stop and move in the direction that the
control switch is moved.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling adjustment memory while sitting in the
vehicle. Push the seat position control knob to the desired position
immediately if the seat moves too
far in any direction.
Easy access function
(if equipped)
With the shift lever in the P position, the
system will move the driver's seat automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward
when the ignition key is removed.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the ignition key is inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward
when the engine start/stop button is
turned to the OFF position or the
smart key is removed from the smart
key holder.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the engine start/stop button is
turned to the ACC or START position
or the smart key is inserted into the
smart key holder.
4 35
Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering
✽ NOTICE
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is controlled by the power steering control unit
which senses the steering wheel torque
and vehicle speed to command the
motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for better control of the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort is increased immediately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the system
performs the EPS system diagnostics.
When the diagnostics are completed,
the steering wheel will return to its
normal condition
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continuously
when the vehicle is not in motion.
However, after a few minutes, it will
return to its normal conditions.
• When you operate the steering wheel
in low temperature, abnormal noise
could occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will disappear. This is a normal
condition.
4 36
If the Electric Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warning
light will illuminate on the instrument
cluster. The steering wheel may become
difficult to control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
Tilt and telescoping steering
(if equipped)
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.
OTF040037
WARNING - Steering wheel
adjustment
Never adjust the angle and height
of the steering wheel while driving.
You may lose steering control
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2) and height (if equipped) (3), then pull
up the lock-release lever to lock the
steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust
the steering wheel to the desired position
before driving.
OTF040039
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel. Check the
horn regularly to be sure it operates
properly.
To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will
operate only when this area is pressed.
4 37
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
OTF040038
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ENGINE START/STOP button in
the ON position, pressing the heated
steering wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button will
illuminate.
To turn the steering wheel off, press the
button once again. The indicator on the
button will turn off.
It will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
If you turn on the ignition again after turning off your engine in half an hour (after
operating heater button), the heating system will be maintained in its 'on' condition.
4 38
• Do not install any grip to operate
the steering wheel. This causes
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated steering wheel, do not use an organic
solvent such as paint thinner,
benzene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the surface of the steering wheel.
• If the surface of the steering
wheel is damaged by a sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components could
occur.
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window is
seen. Make this adjustment before you
start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
which would interfere with your vision
through the rear window.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control.
Night
Day
OTF040040
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with
HomeLink® system and compass
(if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a
Z-Nav® Electronic Compass Display and
an Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature will
automatically detect and reduce rearview
mirror glare while the compass indicates
the direction the vehicle is pointed. The
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver allows
you to activate your garage door(s), electric gate, home lighting, etc.
4 39
Features of your vehicle
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Safety®
(NVS®) Mirror
The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is the
most advanced way to reduce annoying
glare in the rearview mirror during any
driving situation. For more information
regarding NVS® mirrors and other applications, please refer to the Gentex website:
www.gentex.com
OYF049230C
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Channel 1 button
Channel 2 button
Status indicator LED
Channel 3 button
Rear light sensor
Dimming ON/OFF button
Compass control button
Compass display
4 40
CAUTION
The NVS® Mirror automatically
reduces glare during driving conditions based upon light levels monitored in front of the vehicle and
from the rear of the vehicle. These
light sensors are visible through
openings in the front and rear of the
mirror case. Any object that
obstructs either light sensor will
degrade the automatic dimming
control feature.
Automatic-dimming function
Your mirror will automatically dim upon
detecting glare from the vehicles traveling behind you. The auto-dimming function can be controlled by the Dimming
ON/OFF Button:
1. Pressing the
button turns the autodimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED
turning off.
2. Pressing the
button again turns the
auto-dimming function ON which is
indicated by the green Status Indicator
LED turning on.
✽ NOTICE
The mirror defaults to the ON position
each time the vehicle is started.
Features of your vehicle
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is also
equipped with a Z-Nav® Compass that
shows the vehicle Compass heading in
the Display Window using the 8 basic
cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn the
display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the
button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the
button again
to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with press
and hold sequences of the
button and
are detailed below.
There is a difference between magnetic
north and true north. The compass in the
mirror can compensate for this difference
when it knows the Magnetic Zone in
which it is operating. This is set either by
the dealer or by the user. The operating
Zone Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following section.
B520C05NF
4 41
Features of your vehicle
To adjust the Zone setting:
1. Determine the desired Zone Number
based upon your current location on
the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the
button for more
than 3 but less than 6 seconds, the
current Zone Number will appear on
the display.
3. Pressing and holding the
button
again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat …13, 14,
15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button
when the desired Zone Number
appears on the display will set the new
Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the compass
will start displaying a compass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle magnets,
such as installing a ski rack or a CB
antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle
can also cause changes to the vehicle's
magnetic field. In these situations, the
compass will need to be re-calibrated to
quickly correct for these changes. To recalibrate the compass:
4 42
1. Press and hold the
button for more
than 6 seconds. When the compass
memory is cleared a "C" will appear in
the display.
2. To calibrate the compass, drive the
vehicle in 2 complete circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink® Wireless Control
System
The HomeLink® Wireless Control
System provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with a single
built-in device. This innovative feature will
learn the radio frequency codes of most
current transmitters to operate devices
such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Both standard
and rolling code-equipped transmitters
can be programmed by following the outlined procedures. Additional HomeLink®
information can be found at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
Before programming HomeLink® to
a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and
objects are out of the way of the
device to prevent potential harm or
damage. Do not use HomeLink®
with any garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and reverse
features required by U.S. federal
safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect an
object - signaling the door to stop
and reverse - does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards. Using
a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury or death.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF
device you are programming for use in
other vehicles as well as for future
HomeLink® programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons be
erased for security purposes.
Features of your vehicle
Programming HomeLink®
✽ NOTICE
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink® for quicker training and
accurate transaxle of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the second
(or "accessories") position for programming and/or operation of
HomeLink®.
• In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions
after following the programming steps
listed below, contact HomeLink® at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-3553515.
Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press and
hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink® Channel 1 and Channel 3
Buttons, until the indicator light begins
to flash (after 20 seconds). Release
both buttons. Do not hold the buttons
for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away
from the HomeLink® buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both
the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.
4. While continuing to hold the buttons
the red Indicator Status LED will flash
slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® successfully trains to the
frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink® button and observe the
red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pressed and released.
6. To program the remaining two
HomeLink® buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are "codeprotected" and manufactured after 1996
may be determined by the following:
• Reference the device owner's manual
for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears to
program the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver but does not activate the
device.
• Press and hold the trained HomeLink®
button. The device has the rolling code
feature if the indicator light flashes rapidly and then turns solid after 2 seconds
4 43
Features of your vehicle
To train rolling code devices, follow these
instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by garage door
opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the training
button, reference the device owner's
manual or please visit our Web site at
www.homelink.com.
2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button (which activates the
"training light").
✽ NOTICE
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate
step 3.
4 44
3. Return to the vehicle, firmly press and
hold for two seconds the desired
HomeLink® button then release.
Repeat the "press/hold/release"
sequence a second time to complete
the programming. (Some devices may
require you to repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming.)
4. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink® button and observe the
red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate.
5. To program the remaining two
HomeLink® buttons, follow either steps
1 through 4 above for other Rolling
Code devices or steps 2 through 5 in
Standard Programming for standard
devices.
Gate operator & Canadian programming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the Integrated
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
button (note steps 2 through 4 in the
Standard Programming portion of this
document) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter every
two seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.
Operating HomeLink®
To operate, simply press and release the
button.
programmed
HomeLink®
Activation will now occur for the trained
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate
operator, security system, entry door
lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of
the device may also be used at any time.
Features of your vehicle
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button
To program a new device to a previously
trained HomeLink® button, follow these
steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches
away from the HomeLink® surface.
3. Press and hold the handheld transmitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink® button and observe the
red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your new device
should activate.
Erasing HomeLink® buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three programmed
buttons:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for
longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be programmed at
any time following the appropriate steps
in the Programming sections above.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes or
modifications
not
expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the
device.
NVS® and ZNav® are registered trademarks. Nav® are of Gentex Corporation,
Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls Technology
Company, Holland, Michigan.
4 45
Features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both lefthand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch (if
equipped). The mirror heads can be folded to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through
a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or direct
observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.
CAUTION - Rearview
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control.
4 46
OTF040044N
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror the
ignition switch should be in the ACC or
ON position.
Move the lever (1) to R or L to select the
right side mirror or the left side mirror,
then press a corresponding point on the
mirror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the lever into
neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Outside mirror
CAUTION - Electric type
outside rearview mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is
pressed. Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
OTF040046
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Electric Type (if equipped)
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
depress the button.
To unfold it, depress the button again.
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the engine is not running.
In case it is an electric type outside
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
4 47
Features of your vehicle
OTF040045
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
4 48
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer
2. Fuel gauge
3. Speedometer
4. Turn signal indicators
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Odometer/Trip computer
■ Type B
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
OTF040050N/OTF040051N
4 49
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type A
OTF040053N
OTF040052
■ Type B
OTF040055
■ Type B
Instrument panel illumination
The instrument panel illumination intensity can be adjusted by pressing the control switch with the headlight switch in
any position when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The illumination intensity is shown on the
instrument cluster LCD display.
OTF040054N
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in miles
per hour and/or kilometers per hour.
4 50
OTF040056
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
Features of your vehicle
The tachometer pointer may move slightly when the ignition switch is in ACC or
ON position with the engine OFF. This
movement is normal and will not affect
the accuracy of the tachometer once the
engine is running.
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
OUB041046N
OTF040057
Engine coolant temperature gauge
(for Type B cluster)
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond the
normal range area toward the “H” position, it indicates overheating that may
damage the engine.
■ Type B
OUB041047N
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in
section 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly
empty.
4 51
Features of your vehicle
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier than
usual due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
■ Type A
Stop and obtain additional fuel as
soon as possible after the warning
light comes on or when the gauge
indicator comes close to the E
level. Running out of fuel can
expose vehicle occupants to danger.
CAUTION - Low fuel
Avoid driving with extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
4 52
■ Type B
WARNING - Fuel gauge
OTF042060N
Odometer
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
Features of your vehicle
■ Cluster Type A
■ Cluster Type B
TRIP A
TRIP A
TRIP B
TRIP B
Distance to empty
Distance to empty
Average fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Instant fuel consumption
Instant fuel consumption
Average speed
Average speed
Elapsed time
Elapsed time
OTF040059
Trip computer (Tripmeter)
(if equipped)
The trip computer is a microcomputercontrolled driver information system that
displays information related to driving,
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. All stored driving information
(except distance to empty and instant
fuel consumption) will reset if the battery
is disconnected.
Distance to service
4 53
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
OTF042061N
Tripmeter
TRIP A: Tripmeter A
TRIP B: Tripmeter B
This mode indicates the distance of individual trips selected since the last tripmeter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
9999.9 miles (0.0 to 9999.9 km).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or
TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the
tripmeter to zero (0.0).
4 54
■ Type B
OTF042062N
Distance to empty
This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 30 miles (50
km), “---” will be displayed and the distance to empty indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 30 to
999 miles (50 to 999 km).
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupted, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to
empty values may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an estimate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
• Outside temperature unit change (°C
↔ °F) perform the following steps within 10 seconds:
1. Push the RESET button 5 times
2. Push the TRIP button 5 times
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTF042064N
OTF042065N
OTF042066C
Average fuel consumption
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average consumption reset. The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 0.03 mile (50 m).
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the average fuel
consumption is displayed, clears the
average fuel consumption to zero (---).
Instant fuel consumption
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption during the last few seconds.
Average speed
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the average speed
is displayed, clears the average speed to
zero (---).
4 55
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTF040071N
OTF040071AN
OTF042067N
Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time traveled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going while the engine
is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the driving time is
being displayed, clears the driving time to
zero (0:00).
4 56
Distance to Service
To enter the "Distance to Service" mode,
press the TRIP button for less than 1 second.
OTF040072N
Engine Oil (Tire Rotation) Service
Required
1. If service is required, the message will
be displayed.
Features of your vehicle
OTF040074N
OTF040073N
2. If you would like to reset or inactivate
the maintenance system press the
RESET button for more than 1 second.
The display will change to "Engine Oil
Service Message" mode.
You can move to items by pressing the
TRIP button and select the desired
item by pressing the RESET button.
Maintenance
1. When the vehicle is at a standstill,
pressing the TRIP button for more than
2 seconds with the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ON position or
engine running, the LCD display on
the cluster will change to the "User
Setting" mode.
You can move to the items by pressing
the TRIP button and select the item by
pressing the RESET button.
2. In the "User Setting" mode select
"Maintenance".
3. Select the desired maintenance
schedule.
4. If finished, you can come out of the
Maintenance mode by pressing the
TRIP button for more than 2 seconds.
OTF040075N
OTF042076N
4 57
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
Auto Door Lock
Off - The auto door lock operation will be
canceled.
Speed - All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15 km/h (9.3 mph).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automatically locked if the shift lever
is shifted from the P(Park)
position to the R(Reverse),
N(Neutral) or D(Drive) position.
■ Type B
OTF040077N
Vehicle option (if equipped)
1. When the vehicle is at a standstill,
pressing the TRIP button for more than
2 seconds with the ENGINE
START/STOP button in the ON position or engine running, the LCD display on the cluster will change to the
"User Setting" mode.
You can move to items by pressing the
TRIP button and select the item by
pressing the RESET button.
2. In the "User Setting" mode, select
"Vehicle Option".
3. Move (TRIP button) to the desired item
and select (RESET button).
4 58
Auto Door Unlock
Off - The auto door unlock operation will
be inactivated.
Key Out - All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key
is removed from ignition switch
(or smart key is removed from
the smart key holder).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automatically unlocked if the shift
lever is shifted to the P
(Park) position.
Twice Unlock
On - The driver’s door will unlock if the
door is unlocked. When the door is
unlocked again within 4 seconds, all
doors will unlock.
Off - The two turn unlock function will be
inactivated. Therefore, all doors will
unlock if the door is unlocked.
❈ Except the central door lock switch.
Seat Easy Access (only for Driver
Position Memory System equipped
vehicle)
On - The driver's seat will automatically
move forward or rearward for the
driver to enter or exit the vehicle
comfortably.
Off - The Seat Easy Access function will
be inactivated.
Headlamp Escort (if equipped)
On - The Headlamp Escort and Escort
Welcome function will be activated.
Off - The Headlamp Escort and Escort
Welcome function will be inactivated.
Features of your vehicle
Welcome Light (if equipped)
On - The Welcome Light function will be
activated.
Off - The Welcome Light function will be
inactivated.
Welcome Sound (if equipped)
On - The Welcome Sound function will
be activated.
Off - The Welcome Sound function will
be inactivated.
Auto Triple Turn (One-touch triple
turn signal)
On - The lane change signals will blink 3
times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
Off - The Auto Triple Turn function will be
inactivated.
Horn feedback (if equipped)
On - The hazard warning light will blink
and the horn will sound when the
door is locked or unlocked with the
transmitter or smart key.
Off - The hazard warning light will blink
but the horn will not sound when the
door is locked or unlocked with the
transmitter or smart key.
AVG fuel economy
Auto Reset - The average fuel economy
will reset automatically
when you drive after refueling.
Manual Reset - The average fuel economy will not reset automatically when you drive
after refueling.
4 59
Features of your vehicle
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
warning lights are still on, this indicates a
situation that needs attention. When
releasing the parking brake, the brake
system warning light should go off. The
fuel warning light will stay on if the fuel
level is low.
4 60
Air bag warning light
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
This light also comes on when the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is
not working properly. If the air bag warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or started the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, have the SRS inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
This warning light illuminates if the ignition switch is turned to ON and goes off
in approximately 3 seconds if the system
is operating normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that the ABS may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible. The normal braking system will
still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.
Features of your vehicle
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If these two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving, your vehicle’s ABS and EBD system may have
malfunctioned.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
- ABS/brake lights
If both ABS and brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehicle’s brake system will not work
normally during sudden braking.
Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible.
If the ABS warning light or EBD warning
light is on and stays on, the speedometer
or odometer/tripmeter may not work. In
this case, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
Seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON, regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned on, the
seat belt warning light and the seat belt
warning chime will operate for approximately 6 seconds. But if the belts is
refastened within the 6 seconds, the
warning chime will turn off and the warning light will blink for the remainder of the
6 second period.
If the driver's seat belt is disconnected
after the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the seat belt warning light
will blink for approximately 6 seconds.
But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds
the warning light will turn off immediately.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the seat belt warning light and
chime will operate approximately 11
times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and
24 seconds off until the belt is fastened
or the vehicle speed decreases below 3
mph (5 km/h).
4 61
Features of your vehicle
Turn signal indicator
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
Engine oil pressure
warning light
The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
it indicates a malfunction in the turn signal system. You should consult your dealer for repairs.
This indicator also blinks when the hazard warning switch is turned on.
The indicator illuminates when the front
fog lights are ON.
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driving:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized Kia dealer.
High beam indicator
Tail light indicator
This indicator illuminates when the tail
lights are on.
CAUTION - Engine damage
This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
4 62
If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated and
stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may
result.
Features of your vehicle
The oil pressure warning light comes on
whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come
on when the ignition switch is turned ON,
then go off when the engine is started. If
the oil pressure warning light stays on
while the engine is running, there is a
serious malfunction.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning light
Parking brake warning
This warning light illuminates for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and then it will go off.
Also, this light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the START or ON position. The
warning light should go off when the
parking brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have the vehicle towed to any authorized Kia dealer for a brake system
inspection and necessary repairs.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
vehicle. Also, the vehicle will not stop in
as short a distance with only a portion of
the brake system working. If the brakes
fail while you are driving, shift to a lower
gear for additional engine braking and
stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
4 63
Features of your vehicle
Charging system warning
light
Trunk lid open warning
light
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
Kia dealer correct the problem as soon
as possible.
Trunk lid open warning light This warning
light illuminates when the trunk lid is not
closed securely with the ignition switch in
any position.
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immobilizer indicator illuminates, blinks or goes
off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC or ON position, the indicator
will illuminate for a few minutes to indicate that you are able to start the
engine. However, when the smart key
is not in the vehicle, if the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pressed, the
indicator will blink for a few minutes to
indicate that you are not able to start
the engine.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP button changes to the ON position from
the ACC position without the smart key
in the vehicle, the indicator blinks for a
few minutes to indicate that you are not
able to start the engine.
4 64
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.
Features of your vehicle
• When the battery is weak, if the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed, the indicator will blink and you
are not able to start the engine.
However, you are able to start the
engine by inserting the smart key in
the smart key holder. If the smart key
system related parts have a problem,
the indicator will blink.
Low fuel level warning
light
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) (check engine light)
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter (if equipped).
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this indicator light illuminates while driving, it indicates that a potential malfunction has been detected somewhere in the
emission control system.
This indicator light will also illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, and will go off in a few seconds after the engine is started. If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, take your vehicle to the
nearest authorized Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized Kia dealer promptly.
4 65
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - MIL illumina-
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) indicator
ESC OFF indicator
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 seconds. Under normal driving conditions,
the ESC light will remain off.
When the ESC is on, it monitors the driving conditions. When a slippery or low
traction condition is encountered, the
ESC will operate, and the ESC indicator
will blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
If the ESC indicator stays on, the ESC
may have a malfunction. Take your car to
an authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated.
tion
• Prolonged driving with the
Emission
Control
System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
• If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible.Which could
result in loss of engine power.
Have the Engine Control System
inspected as soon as possible by
an authorized Kia.
4 66
Features of your vehicle
Low tire pressure telltale
WARNING - Low tire
Cruise indicator (if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
pressure
The low tire pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position.
If the warning light does not come on, or
continuously remains on after coming on
for about 3 seconds when you turned the
ignition key to the "ON" position, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is not working properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
This warning light will also illuminate if
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible. If
the warning light illuminates while driving, reduce vehicle speed immediately
and stop the vehicle.
Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting at
the steering wheel. Inflate the tires to the
proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and increased braking distances.
Continued driving on tires with low
pressure will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CRUISE
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the cruise
control ON/OFF button on the steering
wheel is pushed.
The indicator goes off when the cruise
control ON/OFF button is pushed again.
For more Information, refer to “Cruise
control system” in section 5.
Shift pattern indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift position is selected.
4 67
Features of your vehicle
Cruise SET indicator
SET
ECOMINDER® indicator
Active ECO system
ECO
LCD display warning (if equipped)
Key is not in vehicle
■ Type A
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
function switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.
The cruise SET indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates when the cruise
control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed.
The cruise SET indicator does not illuminate when the cruise control switch
(CANCEL) is pushed or the system is
disengaged.
When the Active ECO button is pressed
the ECOMINDER® indicator (green) will
illuminate to show that the Active ECO is
operating.
For more detailed information, refer to
“Active ECO” in chapter 5.
WARNING - ECOMINDER®
Key reminder warning chime
(if equipped)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
ignition key is left in the ignition switch
(ACC or LOCK position), the key
reminder warning chime will sound. This
is to prevent you from locking your keys
in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the
key is removed from the ignition switch or
the driver’s door is closed.
4 68
indicator
Avoid distracted driving. Don't keep
watching the “ECO” ECOMINDER®
indicator while driving. It may distract you while driving and cause
an accident.
■ Type B
OTF040081N
If the smart key is not in the vehicle and
if any door is opened or closed with the
ENGINE START/STOP button in the ACC,
ON, or START position, the warning illuminates on the LCD display. Also, the
chime sounds for 5 seconds when the
smart key is not in the vehicle and the
door is closed.
Always have the smart key with you.
Features of your vehicle
Key is not detected
■ Type A
Low key battery
■ Type B
■ Type A
Press brake pedal to start engine
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTF040082N
OTF040083N
OTF040084N
If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is
not detected and you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for 10 seconds.
Also, the immobilizer indicator and the
key holder light blinks for 10 seconds.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed to the OFF position when the
smart key in the vehicle discharges, the
warning illuminates on the LCD display
for about 10 seconds.
Replace the battery with a new one.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed to the ACC position twice by
pressing the button repeatedly without
depressing the brake pedal, the warning
illuminates on the LCD display for about
10 seconds to indicate that you should
depress the brake pedal to start the
engine.
4 69
Features of your vehicle
Shift to "P" position
■ Type A
Insert key
Remove key
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTF040085N
OTF040086N
OTF040087N
If you try to turn off the engine without the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will change
to the ACC position. If the button is
pressed once more it will change to the
ON position. The warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button with the shift lever
in the P (Park) position to turn off the
engine.
When you turn off the engine with the
smart key in the smart key holder, the
warning illuminates on the LCD display
for about 10 seconds. Also, the smart key
holder light blinks for about 10 seconds.
To remove the smart key push the smart
key once and pull it out from the smart
key holder.
If you press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while "Key is not detected" illuminates on the LCD display, the warning
“Insert key” illuminates for about 10 seconds. Also, the immobilizer indicator and
the key holder light blinks for about 10
seconds.
4 70
Features of your vehicle
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
Press start button again
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
Press clutch pedal to start engine
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTF040088N
OTF040089N
OTF040090N
If you can not operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button when there is a
problem with the ENGINE START/STOP
button system, the warning illuminates
for 10 seconds and the chime sounds
continuously to indicate that you could
start the engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button once more.
The chime will stop if the ENGINE
START/STOP button system works normally.
If the warning illuminates each time you
press the ENGINE START/STOP button,
take your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the system checked.
If you try to start the engine with the shift
lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral)
position, the warning illuminates for
about 10 seconds on the LCD display.
You can also start the engine with the
shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but
for your safety start the engine with the
shift lever in the P(Park) position.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed without Depressing the clutch
pedal the warning illuminates on the LCD
display for about 10 seconds to indicate
that you should depress the clutch pedal
to start the engine.
4 71
Features of your vehicle
Align steering wheel
Check stop lamp fuse
(Check brake swithch fuse)
Align steering wheel
■ Type A
OTF040091N
■ Type B
OTF042207N
When the brake switch fuse is disconnected, The warning illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display.
Replace the fuse with a new one.
If that is not possible you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 seconds with
the ENGINE START/STOP button in
ACC.
4 72
OTF040092N
OTF040093N
If you start the engine when the steering
wheel is turned 90 degrees to the left
after a couple of seconds, “Align steering
wheel” illuminates on the LCD display for
5 seconds.
Turn the steering wheel to the right and
make it turned to the left less than 30
degrees.
If you start the engine when the steering
wheel is turned 90 degrees to the right
after a couple of seconds, “Align steering
wheel” illuminates on the LCD display for
5 seconds.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and
make it turn to the right less than 30
degrees.
Features of your vehicle
Align steering wheel
Low tire pressure
■ Type A
Door open
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTF040094N
OTF040095N
OTF040096N
If the steering wheel is aligned within 5
seconds after “Align steering wheel” is
displayed, the indicator will appear like
the above picture.
When one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated, the warning light
comes on.
This indicator displays which door is
opened.
Trunk open
■ Type B
OTF040097N
This indicator displays when the trunk is
not closed securely.
4 73
Features of your vehicle
Illumination
■ Type A
Parking assist warning
■ Type B
■ Type A
Low washer liquid
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTF040098N
OTF040099N
OTF040100N
The illumination intensity of the instrument panel is shown when adjusting it
with the illumination control switch.
Displays the area an obstacle is detected
while moving rearward.
This warning light illuminates for 12 seconds when the washer fluid reservoir is
nearly empty. To turn off the warning light
immediately, press the RESET button for
more than 1 second. Refill the washer
fluid as soon as possible.
4 74
Features of your vehicle
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pressing in the hazard switch. Both
turn signal lights will blink. The hazard
warning lights will operate even though
the key is not in the ignition switch. To
turn the hazard warning lights off, push
the switch again.
■ Type A
OTF040104
■ Type B
OTF040105
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
4 75
Features of your vehicle
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
while backing up.
Sensors
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 47 in. (120 cm).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
OTF040101
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 47 in. (120
cm) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limited. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
4 76
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 47 in. to 32 in. (120
cm to 81 cm) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently.
• When an object is 31 in. to 16 in. (80
cm to 41 cm) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps more frequently.
• When an object is within 15 in. (40 cm)
of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones
are within range of the sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing.
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign matter such as snow or water. (The sensing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 40 in.
(1 m) in height and narrower than 6 in.
(14 cm) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system precautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 15 in. (40 cm) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
4 77
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Self-diagnosis
This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors.
It can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations.
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting the gear to the R
(Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction in the rear parking assist system. If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
4 78
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
OTF040102
2 ~ 4 seconds may be required before
displaying during initial reverse selection.
This occurs when starting and immediately shifting to reverse.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the UVO audio or navigation display
backing-up.
Always keep the camera lens clean. If
lens is covered with foreign matter, the
camera may not operate normally.
WARNING - Backing &
using camera
Never rely solely on the rear view
camera when backing.
WARNING - Rearview
camera
The rear view camera is not a safety device. It only serves to assist
the driver in identifying objects
directly behind the middle of the
vehicle. The camera does NOT
cover the complete area behind the
vehicle.
OTF040103N
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
Note- during initial start up, system may
not display instantly due to the audio system booting up.
4 79
Features of your vehicle
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OTF040113N
Welcome light (if equipped)
When all the doors (and trunk) are locked
and closed, the room lamp will come on
for about 15 seconds if any of the below
is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the vehicle is approached with
the smart key in possession.
4 80
Escort welcome (if equipped)
Interior light
When the headlight (light switch in the
headlight or AUTO position) is on and all
doors (and trunk) are locked and closed,
the position light and headlight will come
on for 15 seconds if any of the below is
performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and trunk)
are locked and closed, the room lamp will
come on for 30 seconds if any of the
below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock or
unlock button, the position light and
headlight will turn off immediately.
At this time, if you press the door lock or
unlock button, the room lamp will turn off
immediately.
Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
turn off automatically if the driver parks
on the side of the road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights) will
remain on for approximately 20 minutes
after the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if
the driver’s door is opened and closed,
the headlights are turned off after 30 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmitter (or smart key) twice or turning off the
light switch from the headlight or Auto
light position.
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the headlight
beam level according to the number of
passengers and the loading weight in the
luggage area.
And it offers the proper headlight beam
under various conditions.
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver's door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlight escort function does not turn
off automatically. Therefore, causes
the battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
WARNING
If the headlights are not working
properly have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Don't attempt to inspect or replace
the wiring yourself to prevent malfunction.
4 81
Features of your vehicle
OXM049110
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
4 82
OAM049041
OAM049042
Parking light position (
)
When the light switch is in the parking
light position (1st position), the tail, position, license and instrument panel lights
will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position (2nd position) the head, tail,
position, license and instrument panel
lights will turn ON.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Features of your vehicle
OVG049181
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
turn ON or OFF automatically depending
on the amount of light outside the vehicle.
Never place anything over the sensor (1)
located on the instrument panel. This will
ensure better auto-light system control.
Do not clean the sensor using a window
cleaner, the cleaner may leave a light film
which could interfere with sensor operation.
If your vehicle has window tint or other
types of metallic coating on the front
windshield, the Auto light system may not
work properly.
OAM049044
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights, push
the lever away from you. Pull it back for
low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched on.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
OAM049043
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low-beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.
4 83
Features of your vehicle
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or
slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a
poor electrical connection in the circuit.
OAM049045
Turn signals and lane change signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). The green arrow indicators on the
instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel
after a turn is completed. If the indicator
continues to flash after a turn, manually
return the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released.
4 84
OAM049046N
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn
on when the fog light switch (1) is turned
to the on position after the headlights are
turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch
(1) to the off position.
When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical
power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor.
Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wipers
Front
OAM049100L
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· HI – High wiper speed
· LO – Low wiper speed
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· AUTO* – Automatic control wipe
· OFF – Off
· MIST – Single wipe
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push the
lever upward and release it. The
wipers will operate continuously if
the lever is held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the
same wiping intervals. Use this
mode in a light rain or mist. To vary
the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
If there is a heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or until
the snow and/or ice is removed before
using the windshield wipers to ensure
proper operation.
Rain sensor
OYF049103
AUTO (Automatic) control
(if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates. When
the rain stops, the wiper stops.
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
* : if equipped
4 85
Features of your vehicle
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper
will operate once to perform a self-check
of the system. Set the wiper to OFF position when the wiper is not in use.
Always remove all snow and ice and
defrost the windshield properly prior to
operating the windshield wipers.
CAUTION - Wiper position
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the OFF position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE - Sensor cover
Do not remove the sensor cover located
on the upper end of the passenger side
windshield glass as this may damage the
sensor system.
✽ NOTICE - Winter driving
Always set the auto wiper switch to the
off position in the winter to avoid auto
activation during icy conditions which
may damage the windshield wipers.
4 86
OYF049101
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the
washer does not work, check the washer
fluid level.
If the fluid level is not sufficient, you add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windshield and obscure your
vision.
CAUTION - Wipers &
windshields
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
4 87
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHT
Do not use the interior lights for extended
periods when the engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING - Interior light
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. The glare from
the interior lights may obstruct
your view and cause an accident.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn off
approximately 20 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the theft
alarm system, the interior lights automatically turn off approximately 3 seconds
after the system is in armed stage.
4 88
OVG049110
Map lamp
Push the lens to turn the map lamp on or
off. This light produces a spot beam for
convenient use as a map lamp at night or
as a personal lamp for the driver and
front passenger.
• DOOR : In the DOOR position, the map
lamp and the room lamp come
on when any door is opened
regardless of the ignition
switch position. When doors
are unlocked by the transmitter
(or smart key), the map lamp
and the room lamp come on
for approximately 30 seconds
as long as any door is not
open.
The map lamp and the room
lamp go out gradually after
approximately 30 seconds if the
door is closed. However, if the
ignition switch is ON or all doors
are locked, the map lamp and the
room lamp will turn off immediately. If a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK position, the map lamp
and the room lamp stays on for
about 20 minutes. However, if a
door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the
map lamp and the room lamp
stays on continuously. If the type
B room lamp switch is OFF, it
doesn't work.
• OFF : The lights turn off even if a door
is opened.
When the lamp is turned ON by
pressing the lens (1), the lamp
does not turn off even if the
switch (2) is in the OFF position.
• ON : The map lamp and the room
lamp stay on at all times.
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
OVG049111
■ Type B
OTF040109
Room lamp
■ Type A
To turn the room lamp push lens (3).
■ Type B
• DOOR : In the DOOR position, the map
lamp and the room lamp come
on when any door is opened
regardless of the ignition
switch position. When doors
are unlocked by the transmitter
(or smart key), the map lamp
and the room lamp come on
for approximately 30 seconds
as long as any door is not
open.
The map lamp and the room
lamp go out gradually after
approximately 30 seconds if
the door is closed. However, if
the ignition switch is ON or all
doors are locked, the map
lamp and the room lamp will
turn off immediately. If a door
is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or LOCK
position, the map lamp and the
room lamp stay on for about
20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened
with the ignition switch in the
ON position, the map lamp
and the room lamp stay on
continuously.
• OFF : The lights turn off even if a door
is opened.
• ON : The room lamp stays on at all
times.
4 89
Features of your vehicle
OTF040110
OTF040112
OLM049105
Trunk room lamp (if equipped)
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
The trunk room lamp comes on when the
trunk is opened.
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
The parking lights or headlights must be
ON for the glove box lamp to function.
Push the switch to turn the light on or off.
•
: The lamp will turn on if this button
is pressed.
•
: The lamp will turn off if this button
is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off position
when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use.
If the sunvisor is closed without turning
the lamp off, it may discharge the battery
or damage the sunvisor.
CAUTION
The trunk room lamp comes on as
long as the trunk lid opens. To prevent unnecessary charging system
drain, close the trunk lid securely
after using the trunk.
4 90
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box
securely after use.
Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
■ Type A
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
If you want to defrost and defog the front
windshield,
refer
to “Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging” in this section.
OTF040114
■ Type B
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is on.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster manually, press
the rear window defroster button again.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on the
rear window defroster.
OTF040115
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
while the engine is running.
4 91
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Fan speed control knob
5. Air conditioning button
2. Front windshield defroster button
6. Mode selection button
3. Rear window defroster button
7. Air intake control button
4. Temperature control knob
4 92
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air or recirculated air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system (if equipped)
on.
OTF040122
4 93
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)
OTF040121
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
4 94
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Features of your vehicle
OTF040123
OTF040124
OTF040125
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the
inside of the vehicle faster.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivered from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to
the right for warm air or left for cooler air.
4 95
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compartment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
OTF040126
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh) air
position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
4 96
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button will not illuminate
when the outside (fresh) air
position is selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of
the windshield and side windows and the
air within the passenger compartment
may become stale.
In addition, prolonged operation of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
OTF040127
OTF040128
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to the
“0” position turns off the fan.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate). Press the button again to turn
the air conditioning system off.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
,
position.
4 97
Features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To prevent dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system, temporarily set the
air intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.
4 98
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled
with
environmentally
friendly
R-134a refrigerant which does not damage the ozone layer.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. However, prolonged operation in the recirculated air
position will excessively dry the air. In
this case, change the air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position, set the mode control to
the MAX A/C position, then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
CAUTION - Excessive AC
While using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up hills
or in heavy traffic when outside
temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may
cause engine overheating and
potential engine damage. Continue
to use the blower fan but turn the
air conditioning system off if the
temperature
gauge
indicates
engine overheating.
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Heater core
Evaporator
core
OMG075033
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
4 99
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia dealer.
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
influence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Compressor
damage
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the
compressor and abnormal system
operation may occur.
The air conditioning system should be
serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
4 100
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
1. Fan speed control switch
2. Driver’s temperature control knob
3. Outside air position button
4. Air conditioning button
5. Front windshield defroster button
6. Mode selection button
7. Passenger's temperature control knob
■ Type B
8. Dual temperature control selection button
9. Rear window defroster button
10. OFF button
11. Recirculated air position button (Type A)
Air intake control button (Type B)
12. AUTO (automatic control) button
13. Climate control display
14. Climate information screen selection button
OTF040129/OTF040175N
4 101
Features of your vehicle
OTF040131
Automatic heating and air conditioning
The automatic climate control system is
controlled by simply setting the desired
temperature.
The Full Automatic Temperature Control
(FATC) system automatically controls the
heating and cooling system as follows:
1. Press the AUTO button. The modes,
fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically
by setting the temperature.
4 102
2. Set the temperature control knob to
the desired temperature.
If the temperature is set to the lowest
setting (Lo), the air conditioning system will operate continuously.
3. To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button or switch of the following:
• Mode selection button
• Air conditioning button
• Front windshield defroster button
• Air intake control button
• Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be controlled
manually while other functions operate
automatically.
For your convenience and to improve the
effectiveness of the climate control, use
the AUTO button and set the temperature
to 73°F (23°C).
OTF040132
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air conditioning
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this case,
the system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air or recirculated air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level
OTF040133N
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
Every time you press the mode selection
button, the mode will change as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the “Manual climate control system”.
Air flow is discharged towards the face and
floor.
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side window defroster.
Floor/Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
4 103
Features of your vehicle
OTF040134N
OTF040124
OTF040135
Defrost-level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivered from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to
the right for warm air or left for cooler air.
4 104
Features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deactivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side
temperature.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control switch. The driver and passenger side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
OTF040137
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
between Fahrenheit to Centigrade as follows:
While pressing the MODE, press the
DUAL button for 3 seconds or more.
The display will change from Fahrenheit
to Centigrade, or from Centigrade to
Fahrenheit.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Fahrenheit.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Pressing the right temperature control button will automatically
switch to the DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the left temperature control to
adjust the driver side temperature.
Operate the right temperature control
to adjust the passenger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HIGH) or lowest (LOW)
temperature setting, the DUAL mode is
deactivated for maximum heating or
cooling.
4 105
Features of your vehicle
Outside thermometer
The current outside temperature is displayed in 1°F (1°C) increments. The temperature range is between -40°F~140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C).
• The outside temperature on the display
may not change immediately like a
general thermometer to prevent the
driver from being inattentive.
• The outside temperature on the display
will update as the vehicle is driven.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compartment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
OTF040138
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select
outside (fresh) air position or recirculated
air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
4 106
Outside (fresh) air position
■ Type A
With the outside (fresh) air
position
selected,
air
enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
■ Type B
function selected.
Features of your vehicle
OTF040139N
OTF040140N
OTF040141N
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by pressing the fan speed control
switch.
To change the fan speed press the
part of the switch for higher speed or
press the
part of the switch for lower
speed.
To turn the fan speed control off, press
the OFF button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However you can
still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
4 107
Features of your vehicle
OTF040142
Climate information screen selection
(if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate information on the screen.
4 108
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the
or
position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather to reduce
the likelyhood of fog up.
• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up
the inside of the windshield.
OTF040143-1
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0” position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is not
selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.
4 109
Features of your vehicle
OTF040144-1
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically.
4 110
OTF040145N-1
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will be
selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is not
selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually.
OTF040146N-1
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will be
selected automatically.
Features of your vehicle
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging up
inside of the windshield, the air intake or
air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions such
as
or
position. To cancel or
return to the defogging logic, do the followings:
OTF040147
OTF040148N
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to the
defrost position (
).
3. Push the air intake control button at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake control
button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second
of interval. It indicates that the defogging
logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select the defroster position before
pressing the defroster button (
).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake control button (
) at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5
second of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
4 111
Features of your vehicle
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture
inside the windshield and
operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher
steps operate as follows. For example, if
auto defogging does not defog inside the
windshield at step 1 Outside air position,
it tries to defog again at step 2 Blowing
air toward the windshield.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defogging status.
✽ NOTICE
If the A/C off or recirculated air position
is manually selected while the auto
defogging system is on, the auto defogging indicator will blink 3 times to give
notice that manual operation is canceled.
OTF040178N
Auto defogging system (Only for
automatic climate control system, if
equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the probability of
fogging up the inside of the windshield by
automatically sensing the moisture
inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is on.
4 112
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Blowing air toward the windshield
Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward the
windshield
Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically activated when the conditions are met.
However, if you would like to cancel the
auto defogging system, press the front
defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds
while pressing the AUTO button. The
indicator will blink 3 times to notify you
that the system is cancelled. To use the
auto defogging system again, follow the
procedures mentioned above.
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.
Always keep the storage compartment
covers closed while driving.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store flammable/explosive
materials in the vehicle. These
items may catch fire and/or explode
if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.
OTF040152N
OTF040153
Glove box
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
OTF040171
Center console storage
(if equipped)
To open the center console storage, pull
up the lever.
4 113
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Do not put perishable food in the cool
box because it may not maintain the
necessary consistent temperature to
keep the food fresh.
✽ NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in the
warm or hot position, warm or hot air
will flow into the glove box.
OTF040154
OTF040155N
Cool box (if equipped)
Sunglass holder
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever of the vent
installed in the glove box to the open
position.
3. When the cool box is not used, slide
the lever to the closed position.
If some items in the cool box block the
vent, the cooling effectiveness of the
coolbox is reduced.
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses with the lenses
facing out.
To close the sunglass holder, push it up.
Do not place other items in the sunglass
holder.
4 114
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holder
WARNING - Avoid
distracted driving
• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle
can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.
Front
■ Type A
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you may burn yourself. Such a burn to the driver
could lead to loss of control of
the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or collision, do not place
uncovered or unsecured bottles,
glasses, cans, etc., in the cup
holder while the vehicle is in
motion.
OTF040158N
■ Type B
OTF040159
WARNING
Rear
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may
explode.
OTF040160
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
4 115
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor to
its original position after use. If the
vanity mirror is not closed securely,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.
OVG049174
OTF040161N
Sunvisor
Power outlet (if equipped)
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or
backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket (if equipped).
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory
plug for prolonged periods of time with
the engine off could cause the battery to
discharge.
Only use 12V electric accessories which
are less than 10A in electric capacity.
Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the
lowest operating level when using the
power outlet.
4 116
Features of your vehicle
Close the cover when not in use.
Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a
vehicle’s power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic systems
or devices used in your vehicle.
Digital clock
■ Type A
Whenever the battery terminals or related fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
WARNING - Electric shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
OTF040162
■ Type B
• HOUR (1) :
Pressing the 'H" button will advance
the time display by one hour.
• MINUTE (2) :
Pressing the "M" button will advance
the time display by one minute.
OTF040163
• Display conversion:
To change the 12 hour format to the 24
hour format, press the "H" and "M" button at the same time for more than 5
seconds.
For example, if the time is 10:15 p.m.,
the display will change to 22:15.
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driving. You may lose your steering
control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
4 117
Features of your vehicle
For driver’s side
For passenger’s side
OUN026348
OEL049222
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
Floor mat anchor(s)
To use the hanger, pull down the upper
portion of the hanger.
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
CAUTION - Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
WARNING - After market
floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of being
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchors. Unsecured floor
mats can interfere with pedal operation.
4 118
The following must be observed when
installing ANY floor mat in the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat
anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot
be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor
mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of one
another (e.g. ,all-weather rubber mat
on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a
single floor mat should be installed in
each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat
anchors that are designed to securely
hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation, Kia
recommends that only the Kia floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle be
installed.
Navigation system (if equipped)
The navigation system ascertains the
present position of your vehicle by using
information from satellites and guides
you to the place you assign as the destination.
Detailed information for the navigation
system is described in a separately supplied manual.
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
If you install an after market HID head
lamp, your vehicle’s audio and electronic device may malfunction.
• Do not clean the inside of the rear
window glass with a cleaner or
use a scraper to remove foreign
deposits as this may cause damage to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and FM
broadcast signals.
OTF040165
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is turned on
while the ignition switch is in either the
“ON” or “ACC” position, your car will
receive both AM and FM broadcast signals through the antenna in the rear window glass.
4 119
Features of your vehicle
VOLUME ( / ) (1)
• Press the lever upward ( ) to increase
the volume.
• Press the lever downward ( ) to
decrease the volume.
3
1
2
SEEK/PRESET (
/
) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different
functions based on the system mode. For
the following functions the button should
be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.
4
TFA_WHEEL_USA_2
Steering wheel audio controls
(if equipped)
The steering wheel may incorporate
audio control buttons.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
CD/USB/iPod mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for less than 0.8 seconds, it will work as
follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
buttons.
4 120
CD/USB/iPod mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN button.
MODE (3)
Press the button to change audio source.
FM(1~2) ➟ AM ➟ SAT(1~3) ➟ CD ➟ USB
AUX(iPod)➟FM...
In addition to mode change, Power on/off
can be made by pressing this button
when the ignition switch is on ACC or
ON.
- Power ON: Press the button when the
audio is off
- Power OFF: Press the button for more
than 0.8 seconds when the audio is on.
MUTE (4, if equipped)
• Press the button to mute the sound.
• Press the button to turn off the microphone during a telephone call.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
Features of your vehicle
FM radio reception
OTF040167N
Aux, USB and
iPod® *
port
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod®
port, you can use an aux port to connect
audio devices and an USB port to plug in
an USB and also an iPod® port to plug in
an iPod®.
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
* iPod® is a Registered trademark of Apple
Inc.
AM radio reception
JBM001
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal
is then received by the radio and sent to
your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
JBM002
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.
4 121
Features of your vehicle
FM radio station
JBM003
JBM004
JBM005
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves away
from the radio station, the signal will
weaken and sound will begin to fade.
When this occurs, we suggest that you
select another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another
station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
4 122
Features of your vehicle
Satellite radio reception
You may experience difficulties in receiving SIRIUS® satellite radio signals in the
following situations.
• If you are driving on a mountain road
where the signal is blocked by mountains.
NOTE:
There may be other unforeseen circumstances leading to reception
problems with the SIRIUS® satellite
radio signal.
SATELITE2
SATELITE1
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top level
of a multi-level freeway.
• If you drive under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks
the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where the
surrounding hills or peaks block the
signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (30 ft. / 10m
or more), for example on a road that
goes through a dense forest.
• The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the SIRIUS® repeater network.
4 123
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
CAUTION
When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a
radio set is used with an internal
antenna alone, it may interfere with
the vehicle's electrical system and
adversely affect safe operation of
the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone while
driving. Stop at a safe location to
use a cellular phone.
4 124
Care of disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows for ventilation
before using your car audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged, hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure only CDs are inserted into
the CD player (do not insert more than
one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CDRW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your car
audio system.
✽ NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that if you
try to play copy protected CDs and the
CD player does not perform correctly
the CDs may be defective, not the CD
player.
Features of your vehicle
■ CD Player : PA710TFU
❋ There will be no
®
logo if the Bluetooth® wireless technology feature is not supported.
TF_USA_RADIO
4 125
Features of your vehicle
3. SEEK Button
SEEK is pressed, it will
• When the
automatically tune to the next lower
station.
• When the SEEK
is pressed, it will
automatically tune to the next higher
station.
4. SCAN Button
TF_USA_RADIO
Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME
and AUDIO CONTROL
1. FM/AM Button
The FM/AM button toggles between FM
and AM. Listed below are the paths as
the system switches from FM to AM and
back to FM.
• FM/AM : FM1➟FM2➟AM➟FM1...
2. POWER Button &
VOL
Knob
• Turns the audio system on/off when
the ignition switch is on ACC or ON.
• If the knob is turned clockwise/counterclockwise, the volume will increase
/decrease.
4 126
• When the button is pressed, it automatically scans the radio stations
upwards.
• The SCAN feature steps through each
station, starting from the initial station,
for 5 seconds.
• Press the SCAN button again to stop
the scan feature and to listen to the
currently selected channel.
5. MUTE Button
When the button is pressed, stops sound
and “Audio Mute” is displayed on LCD.
TF_USA_RADIO
6. PRESET Buttons
1
• Press
~ 6
buttons less
than 0.8 seconds to play the station
saved in each button.
1
• Press
~ 6
button more
than 0.8 seconds or longer to save the
current station to the respective button
with a beep.
Features of your vehicle
TF_USA_RADIO
7. SETUP
Button
Press this button to enter SETUP mode,
If no action is taken for 8 seconds, it will
return to previous mode.
In “SETUP” mode, rotate the TUNE knob
to move the cursor between items, and
push the TUNE knob to select.
• SCROLL
Select whether long file names are scrolled
continuously (On) or just once (Off).
be selected.
• SAT
Select default display of SIRIUS mode.
• SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume Control)
Select this item to turn the SDVC feature
On or Off. If it is turned ON, volume level
is adjusted automatically according to
the vehicle speed.
“Cat./Ch.” or “Artist/Title” can be selected.
• PHONE
Select this item to enter BLUETOOTH
setup mode. Refer to “BLUETOOTH
PHONE OPERATION” section for
• MEDIA
Select default display of MP3 play information. “Folder/File” or “Artist/Title” can
detailed information.
4 127
Features of your vehicle
• MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
TF_USA_RADIO
8. TUNE & Audio Control Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease from
current frequency.
(AM 10kHz, FM 200kHz)
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected
is shown on the display. After selecting
each mode, rotate the Audio control knob
clockwise or counterclockwise.
• BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
4 128
• FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize rear speaker sound (front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
• BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counter clockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
Features of your vehicle
3.
2
Button (REPEAT)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds
to activate 'RPT' mode and more than 0.8
seconds to activate 'FLD RPT' mode.
• RPT : Only a track (file) is repeatedly
played back.
• FLD RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only files
in a folder are repeatedly played back.
4. TRACK Button
TF_USA_CD
Using CD Player
1.
CD
Button
If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode. If
no CD, it displays “No Media” for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.
2.
1
Button (RANDOM)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘ALL RDM’
mode. It wil play the next song at once.
• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc
are played back in a random sequence.
• ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in
a disc are played back in the random
sequence.
• Press T TRACK button for less than
0.8 seconds to play from the beginning
of current song.
• Press T TRACK button for less than
0.8 seconds and press again within
1 second to play the previous song.
• Press T TRACK button for 0.8 seconds or longer to initiate reverse direction high speed sound search of current song.
• Press TRACK
button for less than
0.8 seconds to play the next song.
• Press TRACK
button for 0.8 seconds or longer to initiate forward direction high speed sound search of current song.
6. CD Eject Button
• Press
button to eject the CD.
This button works regardless of ignition
switch status.
7. CD Slot
Insert a CD label side up and gently push
in while ignition switch is on ACC or ON.
The audio automatically switches to CD
mode and begins to play the CD.
If the audio was turned off, audio power
will automatically turn on as the CD is
inserted.
• This audio only recognizes 12cm-size, CDDA (Audio CD) or ISO data-CD (MP3 CD).
• If UDF data-CD or non-CD (e.g. DVD) is
inserted, "Reading Error" message will
be displayed and the disc will be ejected.
CAUTION
Do not insert a CD if CD indicator is
lit.
5. SCAN Button
Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds. To
cancel SCAN Play, press this button again.
4 129
Features of your vehicle
9. INFO
Button
Displays the information of the current
song.
• Audio CD : Disc Title/Artist, Track Title
/Artist, Total Track.
• MP3 CD : File Name, Title, Artist,
Album, Folder, Total Files (Not displayed if the information is unavailable
on the CD or file.)
10. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
TF_USA_CD
8. FOLDER Button
FOLDER button to move to
• Press
child folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Press FOLDER
button to move to
parent folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed.
4 130
• Turn this knob clockwise to browse
songs after current song, or counterclockwise to browse songs before current song. To play the displayed song,
press the knob.
• Pressing this knob without turning
enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to sequentially.
Features of your vehicle
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
4 131
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING
USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.
(Continued)
4 132
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the connected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact
with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device can
be damaged or may malfunction.
Therefore, disconnect the external
USB device when the audio is
turned off or in another mode. (e.g,
Radio, SIRIUS or CD)
• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or
the type of the files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time taken for recognition of the
device.
• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music
files.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music files
on the highest-priority drive are
recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera
that are unrecognizable by standard USB I/F may be unrecognizable by the system.
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be
unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT)
are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please avoid using USB memory
products which can be used as
key chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug type
connector products as shown
below.
4 133
Features of your vehicle
• To cancel RANDOM play, press this
button again.
3.
2
Button (REPEAT)
• Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to repeat current song.
• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or longer
to repeat all songs in current folder.
• To cancel REPEAT, press this button
again.
TF_USA_USB
Using USB device
1.
AUX
Button (USB or AUX)
If the auxiliary device is connected, it
switches to AUX or USB mode to play the
sound from the auxiliary player.
If there is no auxiliary device, then the
message “No Media” will become displayed on the LCD for 3 seconds and
returns to previous mode.
2.
1
Button (RANDOM)
• Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to play songs randomly in current
folder.
• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play songs randomly in entire
USB device.
4 134
TF_USA_USB
4. TRACK Button
• Press the T TRACK button for less
than 0.8 seconds to play from the
beginning of the current song.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec
onds and press it again within 1 second to move to and play the previous
song.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the TRACK
button for less
than 0.8 seconds to move to the next
song. Press the button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to play the song in forward
direction in fast speed.
5. SCAN Button
Plays each song in the USB device for 10
seconds.
To cancel SCAN Play, press this button
again.
6. INFO
Button
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of
FILE NAME ➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟
ALBUM ➟ FOLDER ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟
NORMAL DISPLAY ➟ FILE NAME…
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
Features of your vehicle
8. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
• Turn this knob clockwise to browse
songs after current song, or counter
clockwise to browse songs before current song. To play the displayed song,
press the knob.
• Pressing this knob without turning
enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.
TF_USA_USB
7. FOLDER Button
FOLDER button to move to
• Press
child folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Press FOLDER
button to move to
parent folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed.
4 135
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE FOR USING THE
IPOD® DEVICE
• Some iPod® models might not support the communication protocol
and the files will not be played.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPod Mini®
- iPod® 4th(Photo)~ 6th(Classic)
generation
- iPod Nano® 1st~4th generation
- iPod Touch® 1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod® can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
• If the iPod® disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod®. (Reset
: Refer to iPod® manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally on low battery.
• Some iPod devices, such as the
iPhone®, can be connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless technology
interface. The device must have audio
Bluetooth® wireless technology capability (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth® wireless technology). The
device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.
4 136
CAUTION IN USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• The Kia iPod Power Cable is
needed in order to operate the
iPod with the audio buttons on
the audio system.The USB cable
provided by Apple® may cause
malfunction and should not be
used for Kia vehicles.
❋ The Kia iPod Power Cable may
be purchased through your Kia
Dealership.
• When connecting iPod with the
iPod Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted completely, communications between
iPod and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects of
the iPod and the audio system, the
sound effects of both devices will
overlap and might reduce or distort
the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of the iPod when adjusting the audio system’s volume,
and turn off the equalizer of the
audio system when using the
equalizer of an iPod.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the iPod cable is connected, the system can be switched to
AUX mode even without the iPod
device and may cause noise.
Disconnect the iPod cable when
you are not using the iPod device.
• When not using iPod with car
audio, detach the iPod cable from
the iPod. Otherwise, iPod may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
Features of your vehicle
• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to shuffle order of albums in current category. (Album Random)
• To cancel RANDOM Play, press this
button again.
3.
2
Button (REPEAT)
Repeats the song currently played.
4. TRACK Button
TF_USA_iPod
®
Using iPod
❋
iPod ®
1.
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
AUX
Button (iPod®)
If iPod® is connected, it switches to the
iPod® mode from the previous mode to
play the song files stored in the iPod®. If
there is no iPod® connected, then it displays the message "No Media" for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.
2.
1
Button (RANDOM)
• Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to shuffle order of all songs in
current category. (Song Random)
• Press the T TRACK button for less
than 0.8 seconds to play from the
beginning of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds and press it again within 1 second to move to and play the previous
track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the TRACK
button for less
than 0.8 seconds to move to the next
track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in forward direction in fast speed.
TF_USA_iPod
5. SCAN Button
Plays each song in the iPod device for 10
seconds.
To cancel SCAN Play, press this button
again.
6.
6
Button (MENU)
Moves to the upper category from currently played category of the iPod.
To move to (play) the category (song)
displayed, press TUNE knob.
You will be able to search through the
lower category of the selected category.
The standard order of iPod’s category is
SONGS ➟ ALBUMS ➟ ARTISTS ➟ GENRES ➟ iPod
4 137
Features of your vehicle
To listen to the song displayed in the
song category, press the button to skip to
and play the selected song.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected
is shown on the display. After selecting
each mode, rotate the Audio control knob
clockwise or counterclockwise.
TF_USA_iPod
7. INFO
Button
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of
TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ NORMAL
DISPLAY ➟ TITLE... (Displays no information if the file has no song information.)
8. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
When you rotate the knob clockwise, it
will display the songs (category) ahead
of the song currently played (category in
the same level).
Also, when you rotate the knob counterclockwise, it will display the songs (category) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
4 138
Features of your vehicle
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio information (if equipped)
Satellite Radio channels:
SIRIUS Satellite Radio has over 130 channels, including 69 channels of 100% commercial-free music, plus sports, news, talk
and entertainment available nationwide in
your vehicle. For more information and a
complete list of SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channels, visit sirius.com in the United
States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada, or call
SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite
radio antenna located on the roof of your
vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the
best location for an unobstructed, open
view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are
several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far
away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings,
bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses,
parking garages, dense tree foliage
and thunderstorms can interfere with
your reception.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio service:
NOTE:
SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscriptionbased satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers,
which are available for installation in
motor vehicles or factory installed, as
well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet
connection on personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system
include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the
date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SIRIUS music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet using
any computer connected to the
Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at 1-888539-7474.
Satellite Radio requires SIRIUS® compatible receiver and a subscription service fee after trial period.
Vehicles without a factory-installed
radio receiver require hardware purchase and installation. Please see your
dealer for further details. All fees and
programming subject to change.
Subscriptions governed by the SIRIUS
Terms & Conditions available at
www.sirius.com / service terms.
Available only in the 48 contiguous
United States and the District of
Columbia. Service available in Canada;
see www.siriuscanada.ca
Kia shall not be responsible for any
such programming changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN): This 12-digit Satellite
Serial Number is needed to re-activate,
modify or track your satellite radio
account. You will need this number when
communicating with SIRIUS.
4 139
Features of your vehicle
Please note that the vehicle will need to
be turned on, in Sirius® mode, and have
an unobstructed view of the sky in order
for the radio to receive the activation signal.
1.
TF_USA_SIRIUS
Using SIRIUS® Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3
month complimentary period of SIRIUS®
Satellite Radio so you have access to
over 130 channels of music, information,
and entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your subscription to SIRIUS® Satellite Radio, you
will need to contact SIRIUS Customer
Care at 1-888-539-7474. Have your 12
digit
SID
(Sirius
Identification
Number)/ESN
(Electronic
Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the SID/ESN,
turn on the radio, press the [SAT] button,
and tune to channel zero.
4 140
SAT Button
(SIRIUS® Satellite Radio)
Press the SAT button to switch to
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio. It cycles
through the different bands as noted
below.
SAT1➟SAT2➟SAT3➟SAT1...
• The SCAN feature steps through every
channel, starting from the initial channel, for ten seconds.
• Press the SCAN button again to stop
the scan feature and to listen to the
currently selected channel.
• If "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at
the top of the screen, channel changing is done through the channels within current category.
2. SEEK Button (CHANNEL)
SEEK
• Press
button for less
than0.8 seconds to select previous or
next channel.
SEEK
• Press
button for 0.8 seconds or longer to continuously move to
previous or next channel.
• If “CATEGORY” icon is displayed at the
top of the screen, channel up/down is
done through the channels within current category.
3. SCAN Button
• When the SCAN button is pressed, it
automatically scans the radio stations
upwards.
4.
CAT
Button (CATEGORY)
CAT
• Press
button to enter the
Category List Mode. The display will
indicate the category items, highlight
the category that the current channel
belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press these
buttons to navigate category list.
• Press ENTER Button to select the
lowest channel in highlighted category.
• If channel is selected by selecting category "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed
at the top of the screen.
Features of your vehicle
2. Acquiring Signal
If this message is displayed, it means
that the antenna is covered and that
the SIRIUS® Satellite Radio signal is
not available. Ensure the antenna is
uncovered and has a clear view of the
sky.
6. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
TF_USA_SIRIUS
5.
INFO
Button
Displays the information of the current
channel as below when the button is
pressed each time.
• When default display is
CAT(Category)/CH(Channel) ➟ Artist/Title
➟ Composer (if available) ➟ Category/Channel...
• When default display is
ART(Artist)/TITLE(Title) ➟ Category/Channel
➟ Composer(if available) ➟ Artist/Title...
✽ Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or
unplugged. Please consult with your
Kia dealership.
• Rotate clockwise to increase the channel number or to scroll down the category list.
• Rotate counterclockwise to decrease
the channel number or to scroll up the
category list.
• Press this to make selection of channels or items.
TF_USA_RADIO
7. PRESET Buttons
1
• Press
~ 6
buttons less
than 0.8 seconds to play the channel
saved in each button.
1
• Press
~ 6
buttons for 0.8
seconds or longer to save current
channel to the respective button with a
beep.
4 141
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING
BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS
TECHNOLOGY CELLULAR PHONE
• Do not use a cellular phone or
perform Bluetooth® wireless
technology settings (e.g. pairing
a phone) while driving.
• Some Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled phones may not
be recognized by the system or
fully compatible with the system.
• Before using Bluetooth® wireless
technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth® wireless technology
operations.
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth®
wireless technology related features.
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of
the cellular service area (e.g., in a
tunnel, in a underground, in a
mountainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
4 142
(continued)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is
too loud, it may be difficult to hear
the other person’s voice during a
call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth®
wireless technology system or
cellular service stations can be
disturbed.
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth® wireless
technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth® wireless
technology related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to audio
system. In this case, storing the
device in a different location may
resolve the situation.
NOTE:
If you need more information about
Kia’s Bluetooth® wireless technology,
Visit Kia website “www.kia.com”
(OWNERS>General Info>BLUETOOTH
wireless technology).
Features of your vehicle
BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY PHONE OPERATION
(if equipped)
1
2
3
4
1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2.
button : Activates voice recognition.
3.
button : Places and transfers calls.
4.
button : Ends calls or cancels functions.
is Bluetooth® wireless
technology?
■ What
Bluetooth® is a wireless technology that
allows multiple devices to be connected
in a short range, low-powered devices
like hands-free, stereo headset, steering
remote control, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth® website at
www.Bluetooth.com
■
General Features
• This audio system supports Bluetooth®
wireless technology hands-free and
stereo-headset features.
- HANDS-FREE feature: Making or
receiving calls wirelessly through
voice recognition.
- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing
music from cellular phones (that supports A2DP feature) wirelessly.
• Voice recognition engine of the
Bluetooth® wireless technology system
supports 3 types of languages:
English
Canadian French
US Spanish
✽ NOTICE
• The phone must be paired to the system before using Bluetooth® wireless
technology features.
• Only one selected (linked) cellular phone
can be used with the system at a time.
• Some phones are not fully compatible
with this system.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license. A
Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is
required to use Bluetooth® wireless
technology.
■
Receiving a Phone Call
When receiving a phone call, a ringtone
is audible from speakers and the audio
system changes into telephone mode.
When receiving a phone call, “Incoming
call” message and incoming phone number (if available) are displayed on the
audio.
• To Answer a Call:
- Press
button on the steering wheel.
• To Reject a Call:
- Press
button on the steering wheel.
• To Adjust Ring Volume:
- Use VOLUME buttons on the steering
wheel.
• To Transfer a Call to the Phone (Secret
Call):
- Press and hold
button on the
steering wheel until the audio system
transfers a call to the phone.
4 143
Features of your vehicle
■ Talking
on the Phone
When talking on the phone, “Active Call”
message and the other party’s phone
number (if available) are displayed on the
audio.
• To Finish a Call
- Press
button on the steering wheel.
✽ NOTICE
In the following situations, you or the
other party may have difficulty hearing
each other:
1. Speaking at the same time, your voice
may not reach the other party. (This is
not a malfunction.) Speak alternately
with the other party on the phone.
2. Keep the volume to a low level. Highlevel volume may result in distortion
and echo.
3. When driving on a rough road.
4. When driving at high speeds.
5. When the window is open.
6. When the air conditioning vents are
facing the microphone.
7. When the sound of the air conditioning fan is loud.
4 144
■
Bluetooth® Audio Music Streaming
The audio system supports Bluetooth®
A2DP (Audio Advanced Distribution
Profile) and AVRCP (Audio Video
Remote Control Profile) technologies.
Both profiles provide steaming of music
via compatible “PAIRED” Bluetooth®
wireless technology cellular phone.
To stream music from the Bluetooth®
wireless technology cellular phone, play
your music files on your cellular phone
according to your cellular phone user’s
manual and press the CD/AUX button on
the audio system until “MP3 play” is displayed on the LCD.
The audio system head unit displays
‘MP3 MODE’.
NOTE:
• In addition to streaming MP3 files,
all music and sound files your cellular phone supports can be played
by the audio system.
• Bluetooth® wireless technology
compatible cellular phones must
include A2DP and AVRCP capabilities.
• Some A2DP and AVRCP compatible
Bluetooth® wireless technology
cellular phones may not play music
through the audio system initially.
These cellular phones may need to
have the Bluetooth® wireless technology streaming enabled, for
example;
i.e : Menu ➟ Filemanager ➟ Music ➟
Option ➟ Play via Bluetooth
• Please refer to User’s Guide for your
cellular phone for more information.
To cancel Bluetooth® wireless technology
cellular phone music
streaming, stop music playback on
the cellular phone or change the
audio mode to AM/FM, SIRIUS, CD,
iPod, ect.
Features of your vehicle
■
Phone Setup
All Bluetooth® wireless technology related operations can be
performed in PHONE menu.
1) Push the SETUP button to enter
SETUP mode.
2) Select “Phone” item by rotating the
TUNE knob, then push the knob.
• Pairing a phone
Before using Bluetooth® wireless technology features, the phone must be
paired (registered) with the audio system. Up to 5 phones can be paired with
the system.
NOTE:
• The pairing procedure of the phone
3) Select desired item by rotating the
TUNE knob, then push the knob.
varies according to each phone
model. Before attempting to pair a
phone, please see your phone’s
User’s Guide for instructions.
• Once pairing with the phone is completed, there is no need to pair with
that phone again unless the phone
is deleted manually from the audio
system (refer to “Deleting a Phone”
section) or the vehicle’s information
is removed from the phone.
NOTE:
• If the phone is paired with two or
more vehicles of the same model,
some phones may not handle
Bluetooth® wireless technology
devices of that name correctly. In
this case, you may need to change
the name displayed on your phone.
For example, if the vehicles' name is
KMC CAR, you may need to change
the name displayed on your phone
from KMC_CAR to JOHNS_CAR or
KMC CAR_1 to avoid ambiguity.
Refer to your phone's User’s Guide,
or contact your cellular carrier or
phone manufacturer for instructions.
➀ Press
SETUP button to enter SETUP
mode.
➁ Select “Phone”, then “Pair” in PHONE
menu.
➂ The audio displays “Device : [Name]
passkey: 0000”
➃ Search and select the device name in
your mobile phone to starting the pairing process.
4 145
Features of your vehicle
• Connecting a phone
When the Bluetooth® wireless technology system is enabled, the phone previously used is automatically selected and
re-connected. If you want to select a different phone previously paired, the
phone can be selected through “Select
Phone” menu.
Only one selected phone can be used
with the hands-free system at a time.
➀ Press
mode.
4 146
shown.
➃ The Bluetooth® wireless technology
icon appears on the upper side of audio
display when a phone is connected.
• Changing Priority
If several phones are paired with the
audio system, the system attempts to
connect following order when the
Bluetooth® wireless technology system is
enabled:
1) “Priority” checked phone.
2) Previously connected phone
3) Gives up auto connection.
➀ Press
SETUP button to enter SETUP
➁ Select “Phone”, then “Select” in PHONE
menu.
➂ Select desired phone name from the list
SETUP button to enter SETUP
mode.
➁ Select “Phone”, then “Priority” in PHONE
menu.
➂ Select desired phone name from the
list shown.
Features of your vehicle
• Deleting a Phone
The paired phone can be deleted.
- When the phone is deleted, all the information associated with that phone is
also deleted (including phonebook).
- If you want to use the deleted phone with
the audio system again, the pairing procedure must be completed once more.
• ADVANCED Menu
After pressing the SETUP button, select
the “Phone” menu. while in PHONE
menu, select the “Advanced” menu to
make Bluetooth® wireless technology
Phone settings. (The ADVANCED menu
may differ according to audio specifications.)
➀ Press
SETUP button to enter SETUP
mode.
➁ Select “Phone”, then “Delete” in PHONE
menu.
➂ Select desired phone name from the list
shown.
Incoming Volume (call volume adjustments)
While in ADVANCED menu, select “In Vol.”
Use the knob key to set the desired volume and press the ENTER button.
Contacts Sync (Automatic Phonebook
download setting)
While in ADVANCED menu, select
“Contacts” to automatically save the
contacts and call history in your mobile
phone each time you connect a mobile
device, select ON. If you do not wish for
automatic download, select OFF.
It’s not available to make a phone call by
bluetooth audio system while the phonebook is being downloaded.
Language of Bluetooth® wireless technology voice recognition
While in ADVANCED menu, press
“Language”. To change the language,
select the desired language and press
the ENTER button.
Bluetooth® wireless technology system off
While in ADVANCED menu, press “BT Off”
To turn off the Bluetooth® System.
4 147
Features of your vehicle
■ Voice
Recognition Activation
• The voice recognition engine contained
in the Bluetooth® wireless technology
System can be activated in the following conditions:
- Button Activation
The voice recognition system will be
active when the
button is pressed
and after the sound of a Beep.
- Active Listening
The voice recognition system will be
active for a period of time when the
Voice Recognition system has asked
for a customer response.
• The system can recognize single digits
from zero to nine while a number
greater than ten will not be recognized.
• The system shall cancel voice recognition mode in the following cases : When
pressing the
button and saying
“cancel” following the beep. When not
making a call and pressing the
button. When voice recognition has
failed 3 consecutive times.
• At any time if you say “help”, the system
will announce what commands are
available.
4 148
■
Menu tree
The menu tree identifies available voice
recognition Bluetooth® wireless technology functions.
Call [Name]
Ex) Call John (at Home)
Dial [Number] Ex) Dial 911
Call
By name
By number
Redial
Call Back
Phonebook
Add entry
By voice
By phone
Change name
Delete name
✽ Tip
■ Voice Operation
To receive the best performance from
the Voice Recognition System, observe
the followings:
- Keep the interior of the vehicle as
quiet as possible. Close the window
to eliminate surrounding noise
(traffic noise, vibration sounds,
etc), which may disturb recognizing the voice command correctly.
- Speak a command after a beep
sound within 5 seconds. Otherwise
the command will not be received
properly.
- Speak in a natural voice without
pausing between words.
- While receiving voice commands,
press the
button on the steering wheel remote controller to terminate guidance. Voice command
will convert back to waiting mode
to allow the user to say a new voice
command.
Features of your vehicle
■
Making a Phone Call
• Direct Calling
➀ Press
button.
➁ Say the following command.
- Call <John> : Connects the call to John.
- Call <John> on <Mobile> : Connects
the call to John’s mobile phone number.
- Call <John> at <Home> : Connects
the call to john’s home number.
- Call <John> in <Office> : Connects
the call to John’s office number.
Note:
Calls can be immediately connected
to contacts whose name or voice tag
are saved in the phonebook (or contacts).
• Calling by Name
A phone call can be made by speaking
names registered in the audio system.
➀ Press
button.
➁ Say “Call”.
➂ Say “By name” when prompted.
➃ Say desired name (in Phonebook or
voice tag).
➄ Say desired location (phone number
type). Only stored locations can be
selected.
➅ Say “Yes” to confirm and make a call.
✽ Tip
A shortcut to each of the following functions is available:
1. Say “Call Name”
• Dialing by Number
A phone call can be made by dialing the
spoken numbers. The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine.
➀ Press
button.
➁ Say “Call”.
➂ Say “By number” when prompted.
➃ Say desired phone numbers.
➄ Say “Dial” to complete the number and
make a call.
✽ Tip
A shortcut to each of the following functions is available:
➀ Say “Dial Number”
➁ Say “Dial <digit>”
4 149
Features of your vehicle
■
Phone Book (In-Vehicle)
• Adding entry by voice
Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered. Entries registered in the
phone can also be transferred.
➀ Press
button.
➁ Say "Phonebook".
- The system replies with all available
commands.
- To skip the information message,
press
again and then a beep is
heard.
➂ Say “Add Entry”.
➃ Say “By Voice” to proceed.
➄ Say the name of the entry when
prompted.
➅ Say “Yes” to confirm.
➆ Say the phone number of that entry
when prompted.
➇ Say “Store” if phone number input is
finished.
➈ Say a phone number type. “Home”,
“Work”, “Mobile”, “Other” or “Default” is
available.
➉ Say “Yes” to complete adding entry.
11 Say “Yes” to store additional location
for this contact, or say “Cancel” to finish the process.
4 150
✽ NOTICE
- The system can recognize single digits
from zero to nine. Numbers that are
ten or greater cannot be recognized.
- You can enter each digit individually
or group digits together in preferred
string lengths.
- To speed up input, it is a good idea to
group all digits into a continuous string.
- Recommend to enter the numbers
constituted as grouping within all
digit numbers to dial 995 / 734 / 0000.
- The display corresponding to each
operation appears on the screen as follows:
Input operation example:
1. Say: “Nine, nine, five”
➟ Display: “995”
2. And say: “Seven, three, four”
➟ Display: “995734”
• Adding Entry by Phone
➀ Press
button.
➁ Say "Phonebook".
➂ Say "Add Entry" after prompt.
➃ Say "By Phone" to proceed.
➄ Say “Yes” to confirm.
➅ Your phone will start to transfer
phone/contact list to the audio system.
This process may take over 10 minutes depending on the phone model
and number of entries.
➆ Wait till the audio displays “Transfer
Complete” message.
• Changing Name
The registered names can be modified.
➀ Press
button.
➁ Say “Phonebook”.
➂ Say “Change Name” after prompt.
➃ Say the name of the entry (voice tag).
➄ Say “Yes” to confirm.
➅ Say new desired name.
Features of your vehicle
• Deleting Name
The registered names can be deleted.
➀ Press
button.
➁ Say “Phonebook”.
➂ Say “Delete Name” after prompt.
➃ Say the name of the entry (voice tag).
➄ Say “Yes” to confirm.
■
Bluetooth® wireless technology Audio
Speaker Adaptation
Speaker adaptation will improve performance of voice recognition system to a
particular user voice.
This will degrade the performance for
other users.
• Record
➀ Press
button for 10 sec.
➁ Say “Record profile”.
➂ Say “Yes”.
➃ Say the word displayed on Radio.
• Delete
➀ Press
button for 10 sec.
➁ Say “Delete profile”.
➂ Say “Yes”.
4 151
Features of your vehicle
■
Key matrix
Class
No.
KEY
Connected
Paired H/P
Empty
Disconnected
SHORT
Not Paired
Not Connecting
-
-
Accept Call
-
2nd Call
2nd call
1st Call:waiting 2nd Call:waiting
2nd Call:active 1st Call:active
LONG
-
-
-
-
-
-
Transfer call:secret call
SHORT
VR
MODE Cancel
VR
MODE Cancel
VR
MODE Cancel
VR
MODE Cancel
Reject Call
End Call
End Call
End Call
LONG
[10sec]
-
-
Speaker
Adaptation
(Only English)
Speaker
Adaptation
(Only English)
-
-
-
-
SHORT
Active
Active
Active
Active
-
-
-
-
LONG
[10sec]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Normal mode BT SETUP menu
Incoming Call Outgoing Call
Active Call
2nd Call
1
2
3
4 152
Exhaust system / 5-2
Before driving / 5-3
Key positions / 5-4
ENGINE START/STOP button / 5-6
Starting the engine / 5-9
Manual transaxle / 5-12
Automatic transaxle / 5-15
Brake system / 5-21
Cruise control system / 5-32
Active eco system / 5-36
Economical operation / 5-37
Driving your vehicle
Special driving conditions / 5-39
Winter driving / 5-43
Vehicle load limit / 5-47
Vehicle weight / 5-52
5
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system does
not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked
whenever the vehicle is raised to change
the oil or for any other purpose. If you
hear a change in the sound of the
exhaust or if you drive over something
that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, have the exhaust system
checked as soon as possible by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in an
enclosed area for a prolonged time.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless, odorless
gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
5 2
WARNING - Open trunk
Do not drive with the trunk open.
Poisonous exhaust gases can enter
the passenger compartment If you
must drive with the trunk open proceed as follows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan at
the highest speed.
WARNING - California
proposition 65
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in
Section 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsibility
is in the safe and legal operation of
the vehicle. Use of any hand held
devices, other equipment or vehicle
systems that distract the driver
should not be used during vehicle
operation.
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes off.
For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.
WARNING
- Check surrounding
Always check the surrounding areas
near your vehicle for people, especially children, before putting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
5 3
Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Even a small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment. Driving while under
the influence of drugs is as dangerous as or more dangerous than
driving drunk.
WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop the
vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accelerator
pedal for a long period of time. It
may overheat the engine or exhaust
system and cause a fire.
OTF050001
WARNING - Loose object
Securely store items in your vehicle. When you make a sudden stop
or turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the floor
and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
5 4
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is
not in the ON position. The light will go off
immediately when the ignition switch is
turned on. It will also go off after about 30
seconds after the door is closed.
Driving your vehicle
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
OTF050002
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
The anti-theft steering column lock is not
a substitute for the parking brake. Before
leaving the driver’s seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged in 1st gear
for the manual transaxle or P (Park) for
the automatic transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine off.
ON
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started. This is the normal
running position after the engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake warning light can be checked in this position.
WARNING - Ignition switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
WARNING - Steering wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel while
the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this
area could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
5 5
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
Not illuminated
OTF050005
Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP
button
Whenever the front door is opened, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will illuminate for your convenience. The light will
go off after about 30 seconds after the
door is closed.
5 6
To turn off the engine (START/STOP
position) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the ENGINE START/STOP button
with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. When you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will not
change to the OFF position but to the
ACC position.
Also, the steering wheel locks when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is in the
OFF position to protect against theft.
It locks when the door is opened or when
you pull out the smart key from the smart
key holder.
If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver's door, the
warning chime will sound. Try locking the
steering wheel again. If the problem is
not solved, have it checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
In addition, if the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the OFF position after the driver's door is opened, the steering wheel
will not lock and the warning chime will
sound. In such a event, close the door.
Then the steering wheel will lock and the
warning chime will stop.
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly, the ENGINE START/STOP button
will not work. Press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while turning the
steering wheel right and left to release
the tension.
In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the
engine off and to the ACC position by
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times
successively within 3 seconds. If the
vehicle is still moving, you can restart the
engine without depressing the brake
pedal by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position.
Driving your vehicle
ACC(Accessory)
ON
Orange indicator
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
while it is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and electrical accessories are operational.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC position for more than 1 hour,
the button is turned off automatically to
prevent battery discharge.
START/RUN
Green indicator
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
while it is in the ACC position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the ENGINE START/STOP button in the
ON position for a long time. The battery
may discharge, because the engine is
not running.
Not illuminated
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift lever
in the P (Park) or the N (Nuetral) position.
For your safety, start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
If you press the ENGINE START/STOP
button without depressing the brake
pedal, the engine will not start and the
button will change as follows:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF
5 7
Driving your vehicle
If you leave the ENGINE START/ STOP
button in the ACC or ON position for a
long time, the battery will discharge.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button while the vehicle is in motion. This would result in
loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an
accident.
5 8
Driving your vehicle
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, sandals, etc.) may interfere
with your ability to use the brake
and accelerator pedals.
Starting the engine with an ignition key (if equipped)
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
CAUTION - Starter
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in
motion, do not attempt to move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit, you may put the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START position
in an attempt to restart the engine.
5 9
Driving your vehicle
OTF050007
Starting the engine with a smart
key (if equipped)
1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park).
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while depressing the brake pedal.
5. In extremely cold weather (below 0°F /
-18°C) or after the vehicle has not
been operated for several days, let the
engine warm up without depressing
the accelerator.
5 10
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing the
accelerator.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
but is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position or above, if
any door is opened, the system checks
for the smart key. If the smart key is not
KEY
in the vehicle,the “ OUT
” indi” or “
cator will blink or the warning "Key not
in vehicle" will illuminate on the LCD
display. And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds. The
indicator or warning will turn off while
the vehicle is moving. Always have the
smart key with you.
The engine will start only when the smart
key is in the vehicle.
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar with
the vehicle operation. Pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button while
the smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine activation and/or unintended vehicle
movement.
Driving your vehicle
OTF050006
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by inserting the smart key
in the smart key holder.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If it is
not possible, you can start the engine
by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP
button for 10 seconds while it is in the
ACC position. The engine can start
without depressing the brake pedal.
But for your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/ STOP
button for more than 10 seconds except
when the stop lamp fuse is blown.
5 11
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Manual transaxle operation
The shift lever can be moved withoutpressing the button.
The button (1) should be pressed when
moving the shift lever into reverse.
OTF050009N
5 12
The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized
in all forward gears so shifting to either a
higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.
Depress the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock switch, the engine will not start
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal.
The shift lever must be returned to the
neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The ring (1) located below the
shift knob must be pulled upward while
moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
position.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
CAUTION - Downshifting
Do not downshift more than 2 gears
or downshift the gear when the
engine is running at high speed
(5,000 RPM or higher). Such downshifting may damage the engine.
Driving your vehicle
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant is
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),
leave the shift lever at neutral position
and release the clutch. Depress the
clutch pedal and then shift into 1st or R
(Reverse) gear position.
CAUTION - Premature wear
Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can
result in premature wear of the
transaxle shift forks.
WARNING - Incline parking
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then make
sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st
gear when the vehicle is parked on
a level or uphill grade, and shifted
into R (Reverse) on a downhill
grade. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur if
these precautions are not followed
in the order identified.
Using the clutch
The clutch should be depressed all the
way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal should
always be fully released while driving. Do
not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the
clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline.
This causes unnecessary wear. Use the
foot brake or parking brake to hold the
vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the
clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you need to increase your speed
again. When the vehicle is traveling down
steep hills, downshifting helps maintain
safe speed and prolongs brake life.
5 13
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, shift to a lower gear. When
you do this, engine braking will help
slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse). The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not.
5 14
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured or killed
than a properly belted occupant.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
WARNING - Vehicle
handling
Avoid high speeds when cornering
or turning. High speed cornering
and turning increases the risk of
vehicle rollover due to loss of vehicle control. Rollover accidents are
extremely violent and unpredictable.
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Automatic transaxle operation
Shift lever
Button
The automatic transaxle has 6 forward
speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
✽ NOTICE
+ (UP)
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
- (DOWN)
To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.
Press the button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
OTF050010-1
5 15
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your transaxle,
do not accelerate the engine in R
(Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on. The
transaxle may be damaged if you
shift into P (Park) while the vehicle
is in motion.
When stopped on an upgrade, do not
hold the vehicle with engine power. Use
the service brake or the parking brake.
5 16
Transaxle ranges
The indicator light in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is
in motion will cause the drive wheels to
lock which will cause you to lose control
of the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking the
Vehicle” explained in this section.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving position. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
Sports mode
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
OTF050012
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stopped or in
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
5 17
Driving your vehicle
Up (+)
: Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
• In sports mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever to
the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system
may not execute certain gearshifts
when the shift lever is operated.
5 18
• When driving on a slippery road, push
the shift lever forward into the +(up)
position. This causes the transaxle to
shift into the 2nd gear which is better
for smooth driving on a slippery road.
Push the shift lever to the -(down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
OTF050013
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when the
shift lever is in the D position or the sport
mode.
Driving your vehicle
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter can operate when the
vehicle speed is more than 6.2 mph.
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear and the system
changes from automatic mode to manual
mode.
If the vehicle speed is lower than 10km/h,
if you depress the accelerator pedal for
more than 7 seconds or if you shift the
shift lever from D to sports mode and
shift it from sports mode to D again, the
system change from manual mode to
automatic mode.
With the shift lever in the sports mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear.
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle shifters at
the same time, you can't shift the gear.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle out of P (Park)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R
(Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle.
OTF050011
Shift-lock override
(with smart key system)
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into
the R (Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depressing
the brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
shift-lock access hole (1).
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
access hole and press down on the
key (or screwdriver).
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
5 19
Driving your vehicle
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.
5 20
Moving up a steep grade from a standing start
To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
CAUTION - Brake pedal
Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. This will create
abnormally high brake temperatures which can cause excessive
brake lining and pad wear.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
WARNING - Parking brake
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of the
brakes when descending a long or
steep hill by shifting to a lower
gear. Continuous brake application
will cause the brakes to overheat
and could result in a temporary
loss of braking performance.
Avoid applying the parking brake to
stop the vehicle while it is moving
except in an emergency situation.
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may
also pull to one side when the brakes are
applied. Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been affected
in this way. To dry the brakes, apply them
lightly while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance returns to
normal.
5 21
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a highpitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You
may hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress the
brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
CAUTION - Replace brake
pads
Do not continue to drive with worn
brake pads. Continuing to drive
with worn brake pads can damage
the braking system and result in
costly brake repairs.
Always replace the front or rear brake
pads as pairs.
5 22
WARNING - Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched wear
sounds from your brakes. If you
ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
OTF050015
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
Foot type
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then depress the parking brake pedal down as far as possible.
Driving your vehicle
OTF050014
OTF050017
OTF050016
Hand type
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then without pressing
the release button in, pull the parking
brake lever up as far as possible. In addition it is recommended that when parking
the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever
should be positioned in the appropriate
low gear for manual transaxle vehicles or
in the P (Park) position for automatic
transaxle vehicles.
Releasing the parking brake
Foot type
To release the parking brake, depress
the parking brake pedal a second time
while applying the foot brake. The pedal
will automatically extend to the fully
released position.
Hand type
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly, press the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) while holding the button.
CAUTION - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive brake
pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.
5 23
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
(if equipped)
WARNING - Parking brake
use
All vehicles should always have the
parking brake fully engaged when
parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can
injure occupants or pedestrians.
W-75
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will illuminate when the
parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released while
the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction in the brake system.
Immediate attention is necessary.
If at all possible, stop driving the vehicle
immediately. If that is not possible, use
extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle
until you can reach a safe location or
repair shop.
5 24
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents
due to improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehicle control
is improved during emergency braking,
always maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.
The vehicle should be driven at reduced
speeds in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving with tire chains installed
• When driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has different surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases the
stopping distance for your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situation allows the ABS to control the force
being delivered to the brakes.
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
W-78
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the
ABS will go through self-diagnosis and
the light will go off if everything is normal.
If the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS but your regular
brakes will work normally. Contact an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
5 25
Driving your vehicle
• When you drive on a road with poor
traction, such as an icy road, and operated your brakes continuously, the
ABS will be active continuously and the
ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull
your vehicle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS warning
light is off, then your ABS is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a problem
with the ABS. Contact an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
OTF050018
✽ NOTICE
Electronic stability control (ESC)
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS has malfunctioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks
where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
5 26
Electronic stability control (ESC) will not
prevent accidents. Excessive speed in
turns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and attentive
driver can prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose
traction. Even with ESC installed, always
follow all the normal precautions for driving - including driving at safe speeds for
the conditions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system
self-check and does not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to
increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESC will automatically turn
on again.
5 27
Driving your vehicle
■ ESC indicator light
WARNING
- Electronic stability control
■ ESC OFF indicator light
Indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then goes
off if ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes on
when the ESC is turned off with the button.
Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes
may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure
they are the same size as your original
tires.
5 28
Drive carefully even though your
vehicle has Electronic Stability
Control. It can only assist you in
maintaining control under certain
circumstances.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned
on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the
ESC OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
Never press the ESC OFF button while
ESC is operating (ESC indicator light
blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control.
Driving your vehicle
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
WARNING - Operating ESC
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may go out of
control.
Hill start Assist Control is a comfort function. The main intent is to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards while driving uphill on an inclined surface. HAC
holds the braking pressure builtup by
driver during stopping procedure for 2
seconds after releasing brake pedal.
During the pressure-hold period, the
driver has enough time to press the
accelerator pedal to drive off.
The braking pressure is reduced as soon
as the system detects the driver’s intention to drive off.
• The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the
ESP is off but it does not activate when
the ESP has malfunctioned.
WARNING - Activating
HAC
Drivers should pay close attention
when activating the HAC. The vehicle may roll backward causing an
accident due to insufficient brake
hold pressure.
5 29
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further enhancements to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driving on a
slippery road or a vehicle detected
changes in coefficient of friction between
right wheels and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC indicator light (
) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light (
) remains
on the instrument cluster
• ESC indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
5 30
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to turn
off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and
the ESC OFF indicator light (
) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected somewhere in the Electric Power Steering system or VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light (
) or ESC warning light remains
on, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the system checked.
• The VSM is designed to function above
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) on
curves.
• The VSM is designed to function above
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) when
a vehicle is braking on a split-mu road.
The split-mu road is made of surfaces
which have different friction forces.
• The Vehicle Stability Management system is not a substitute for safe driving
practices but a supplementary function
only. It is the responsibility of the driver
to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. Always
hold the steering wheel firmly while
driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention, even
with installed VSM. Always follow all
the normal precautions for driving at
safe speeds for the conditions – including driving in inclement weather and on
a slippery road.
WARNING - Tire/Wheel
size
When replacing tires and wheels,
make sure they are the same size
as the original tires and wheels
installed. Driving with varying tire
or wheel sizes may diminish any
supplemental safety benefits of the
VSM system.
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle
will not stop as quickly if the brakes are
wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle
to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the vehicle
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and call
an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the vehicle
out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
times, use the brakes to slow down,
then shift to a lower gear so that
engine braking will help you maintain a
safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because the
brakes might overheat and lose their
effectiveness. It also increases the
wear of the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
vehicle pointed straight ahead while
you slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping
forward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the shift lever
in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
5 31
Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cruise control system allows you to
✽ NOTICE
program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the cruise control is left on, (CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminated) the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise
control system off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise control is not
in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a
speed.
Use the cruise control system only when
traveling on open highways in good
weather.
Do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill
roads.
5 32
During normal cruise control operation,
when the SET switch is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control or Cruise
Control Misuse
Do not use cruise control if the traffic situation does not allow you to
drive safely at a constant speed
and with sufficient distance to the
vehicle in front.
OTF050020
To set cruise control speed:
1. Press the CRUISE ON-OFF button on
the steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Driving your vehicle
OTF050021
3. Move the lever (1) down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
SET indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate. Release the accelerator at the same time. The desired
speed will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
downhill.
OTF050022
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1.0 mph (1.6
km/h ) each time the lever is operated in
this manner.
OTF050021
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1.0 mph (1.6
km/h) each time the lever is operated in
this manner.
5 33
Driving your vehicle
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, move
the lever up (to RES+). You will return to
your previously preset speed.
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with the cruise control operation or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
OTF050023
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic
transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
5 34
Driving your vehicle
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
OTF050022
• Press the CRUISE ON-OFF button
(the CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want to
resume the cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h):
If any method other than the CRUISE
ON-OFF switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed will
automatically resume when you move
the lever up.
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
5 35
Driving your vehicle
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Limitation of Active ECO operation:
OTF050024
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency
by controlling the engine and transaxle.
But fuel-efficiency can be affected by the
driver's driving habits and road conditions.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green) will
illuminate to show that the Active ECO
is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated, it
does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn off
the system, press the active ECO button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, it will return
to the normal mode.
5 36
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though there is
no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is low:
The system will be limited until engine
performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because the
engine torque is restricted.
• When using sports mode:
The system will be limited according to
the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is deeply
pressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited,as it has
determined that the driver has accelerated judging that the driver wants to
speed up.
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid
heavy traffic whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your vehicle
uses. Driving at a moderate speed,
especially on the highway, is one of the
most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can
increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components.
In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the
brakes to overheat, which reduces
their effectiveness and may lead to
more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition.
For better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. If you
drive your vehicle in severe conditions,
more frequent maintenance is required
(see section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the vehicle. This
extra weight can result in increased
fuel consumption and also contribute
to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces
fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
5 37
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a very
high gear resulting in engine bucking. If
this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended
speed.
5 38
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is reduced by crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia
dealer perform scheduled inspections
and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine running. In addition, turning off the
ignition while driving could engage
the steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine braking
effect.
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light upand-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an automatic
transaxle while driving on slippery
surfaces. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires to
skid and result in an accident.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free
it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the
area around your front wheels. Then, shift
back and forth between 1st (First) and R
(Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a
manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped with an
automatic transaxle. Do not race the
engine, and spin the wheels as little as
possible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow
vehicle to avoid engine overheating and
possible damage to the transaxle.
The ESC system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
CAUTION - Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.
5 39
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 35 mph (56
km/h). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage.
WARNING - Sudden
OBH058035L
vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle if
people or objects are nearby. The
vehicle may suddenly move forward or backwards as it becomes
unstuck.
5 40
OMC035004
Smooth cornering
Driving at night
Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
Driving your vehicle
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.
1JBB3303
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
5 41
Driving your vehicle
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
5 42
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread before
driving your vehicle. Worn-out tires
can result in loss of vehicle control.
Worn-out tires should be replaced
as soon as possible. For further
information and tread limits, refer
to "Tires and wheels" in section 7.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both the engine coolant and
engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may overheat the engine.
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or Icy conditions
1JBB3305
Severe weather conditions in the winter
result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter
driving, you should follow these suggestions:
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in
front and your vehicle. Also, apply the
brake gently. It should be noted that
installing tire chains on the tire will provide greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before installing tire
chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against
their use.
5 43
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Snow chains
Make sure the snow chains are the
correct size and type for your tires.
Incorrect snow chains can cause
damage to the vehicle body and
suspension and may not be covered by your vehicle manufacturer's
warranty.
1JBA4068
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wiretype chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.
Install tire chains only on the front tires.
5 44
The snow chain connecting hooks may
be damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow chains to
come loose from the tire. Make sure the
snow chains are SAE class “S” certified.
Always check chain installation for proper mounting after driving approximately
0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to ensure
safe mounting. Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park the
vehicle on level ground away from traffic.
Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning
flashers and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle
if available.
Driving your vehicle
• The use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h) or the
chain manufacturer’s recommended
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel
braking.
CAUTION - Snow chains
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
Check battery and cables
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section
7. The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized Kia dealer
or a service station.
5 45
Driving your vehicle
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized Kia dealer
and most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of antifreeze as these may damage the paint
finish.
5 46
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weather you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you
may want to carry include tire chains, tow
straps or chains, flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a
window scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls, a blanket, etc.
TRAILER TOWING
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
Tire and loading information label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
904 lbs. (410 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
OTF050040N/OTF050041N/OTF050042N/OTF052043N/OTF052044N/OTF052045N
5 47
Driving your vehicle
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
5 48
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit -
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
Example 1
A
Example 2
B
C
A
Example 3
B
C190F01JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight
Subtract Occupant
Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
Available Cargo and
Luggage weight
Total
849 lbs
(385 kg)
C
A
B
C190F02JM
Item
A
300 lbs
(136 kg)
B
549 lbs
(249 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight
Subtract Occupant
Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
Available Cargo and
Luggage weight
Total
849 lbs
(385 kg)
C
C190F03JM
Item
A
750 lbs
(340 kg)
B
99 lbs
(45 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight
Subtract Occupant
Weight
161 lbs (73 kg) × 5
Available Cargo and
Luggage weight
Total
849 lbs
(385 kg)
805 lbs
(365 kg)
44 lbs
(20 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
5 49
Driving your vehicle
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
OEN056020
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
5 50
WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle
capacity
weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling--all of which may result in
a crash.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sudden stop or crash.
✽ NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
5 51
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the compliance label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
5 52
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s
door sill.
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2
If the engine will not start / 6-3
Emergency starting / 6-4
If the engine overheats / 6-7
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-8
If you have a flat tire / 6-13
Towing / 6-27
What to do in an emergency
6
What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
OTF040104
OTF040105
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
6 2
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the vehicle slow down while
driving straight ahead. Do not apply the
brakes immediately or attempt to pull
off the road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the vehicle has slowed
down to such a speed that it is safe to
do so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If
you are on a divided highway, do not
park in the median area between the
two traffic lanes.
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse
(manual transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the vehicle that is away from
traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this section.
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
If the engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, check all connectors at the
ignition coil and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
WARNING - Push/pull start
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. Push or pull starting may
cause the catalytic converter to
overload and create a fire hazard.
6 3
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jumper Cables
CAUTION - 12 volt battery
(-)
(-)
(+)
Discharged battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
(+)
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
Booster battery
1VQA4001
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow these jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
6 4
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which will
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode.
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery is
frozen or if the electrolyte level is
low as the battery may rupture or
explode.
risk
When jump starting your vehicle be
careful not to get acid on yourself,
your clothing or on the vehicle.
Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive.
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) batteries
are maintenance-free and should only be
serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. For
charging your AGM battery, use only fully
automatic battery chargers that are specially developed for AGM batteries.
When replacing the AGM battery, use
only the Kia genuine battery for the ISG
system.
✽ NOTICE
If the AGM battery is reconnected or
replaced, ISG function will not operate
immediately.
If you want to use the ISG function, the
battery sensor needs to be calibrated for
approximately 4 hours with the ignition
off and then, turn the engine on and off
2 or 3 times.
CAUTION - AGM battery
cap
Do not open or remove the cap on
top of the battery. This may cause
the leak of dangerous internal electrolytes.
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to a solid, stationary,
metallic point (for example, the engine
lifting bracket) away from the battery
(4). Do not connect it to or near any
part that moves when the engine is
cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
6 5
What to do in an emergency
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control system.
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
WARNING - Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
6 6
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you will experience a loss of
power, or hear loud pinging or knocking,
the engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle)
or
neutral
(manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the vehicle or steam is coming out
from underneath the hood, stop the
engine. Do not open the hood until the
coolant has stopped running or the
steaming has stopped. If there is no
visible loss of engine coolant and no
steam, leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cooling
fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check for
coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air
conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from
it when you stop).
WARNING - Under the
hood
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant leaks, stop the
engine immediately and call the nearest authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates there is
a leak in the cooling system and this
should be checked as soon as possible
by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
6 7
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
6 8
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
What to do in an emergency
If the TPMS indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position or
engine is running, or it comes on
after blinking for approximately one
minute, take your car to your nearest
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
Low tire pressure telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicator is illuminated, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated after restarting and about
20 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low pressure tire
repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
In winter or cold weather, the low tire
pressure telltale may be illuminated if
the tire pressure was adjusted to the
recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not mean
your TPMS is malfunctioning
because the decreased temperature
leads to a proportional lowering of
tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or
lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation pressure.
6 9
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Do not drive on low pressure
tires. Significantly low tire pressure can cause the tires to overheat and fail making the vehicle
unstable resulting in increased
braking distances and a loss of
vehicle control.
6 10
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under inflation warning at the same time as system failure then it will illuminate the
TPMS malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible to determine the cause of
the problem.
The TPMS malfunction indicator may
be illuminated if the vehicle is moving
around electric power supply cables
or radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the Tire
Pressure
Monitoring
System
(TPMS).
The TPMS malfunction indicator may
illuminate if snow chains or some
separately purchased devices such
as notebook computers, mobile
charger, remote starter, navigation
etc. are used in the vehicle. This can
interfere with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
What to do in an emergency
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure will come on. Have the flat
tire repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.
CAUTION - Repair agents
NEVER use a puncture-repairing agent to repair and/or inflate
a low pressure tire. The tire
sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensor. If used, you
will have to replace the tire pressure sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will blink or remain
on until the low pressure tire is
repaired and placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the TPMS spare tire, the
Low Tire Pressure telltale may blink
or illuminate after a few minutes
because the TPMS sensor mounted
on the spare wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflated to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or the
TPMS sensor mounted on the
replaced spare wheel is initiated by
an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS
malfunction indicator and the low tire
pressure telltale will extinguish within
a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, please
visit an authorized Kia dealer.
If original mounted tire is replaced
with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor
on the replaced spare wheel should
be initiated and the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel should
be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor
on the original mounted wheel located in the spare tire carrier still activates, the tire pressure monitoring
system may not operate properly.
Have the tire with TPMS serviced or
replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
6 11
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
The TPMS cannot alert you to severe
and sudden tire damage caused by
external factors such as nails or road
debris.
If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly
move to a safe position off the road.
6 12
✽ NOTICE
Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may
interfere with the system's ability to
warn the driver of low tire pressure
conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying,
or disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for
that portion of the vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OTF060002
Jack and tools
The spare tire, jack, jack handle and
wheel lug nut wrench are stored in
the luggage compartment.
Remove the luggage under tray out
of the way to reach the equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
WARNING - Changing tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
Always move the vehicle completely
off the road and onto the shoulder
before trying to change a tire. The
jack should be used on firm level
ground. If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a towing service company for assistance.
Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehicle;
never use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jack support.
WARNING - Tire Jack
Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is
only supported by a jack since
the vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support
stands.
6 13
What to do in an emergency
Do not allow anyone to remain in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
Make sure any children present are
in a secure place away from the road
and from the vehicle to be raised with
the jack.
WARNING - Running vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
6 14
ONF068004
OED066033
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or
P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flasher.
What to do in an emergency
To prevent vehicle movement while
changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
We recommend that the wheels of
the vehicle be chocked, and that no
person remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
1JBA6504
OTF060004
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
6 15
What to do in an emergency
1JBA6025
OTF060008
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 1 in (30 mm). Before
removing the wheel lug nuts, make
sure the vehicle is stable and that
there is no chance for movement or
slippage.
6 16
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
What to do in an emergency
Wheels and wheel covers may have
sharp edges. Handle them carefully
to avoid possible injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure
that there is nothing on the hub or
wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)
that prevents the wheel from fitting
solidly against the hub.
WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
OTF060007
Then position the wrench as shown in
the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.
Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the
wrench handle or use an extension
pipe over the wrench handle.
Go around the wheel tightening every
nut following the numerical sequence
shown in the image until they are tight.
Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing the wheels, have
an authorized Kia dealer tighten the
wheel nuts to their proper torque as
soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
65~79 lb.ft (9~11 kg.m)
6 17
What to do in an emergency
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
CAUTION - Reducing lug
nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
6 18
WARNING - Wheel studs
Do not drive your vehicle with
damaged wheel studs. If the
studs are damaged, they may
lose their ability to retain the
wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
What to do in an emergency
Important - use of compact spare tire
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
You should drive carefully when the
compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and rim at
the first opportunity.
The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
WARNING - Spare tire
Do not operate your vehicle on
this compact spare at speeds
over 50 mph (80 km/h). The
compact spare tire is for emergency use only. The original tire
should be repaired or replaced
as soon as is possible to avoid
failure of the spare.
The compact spare should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
1 inch (25 mm), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
6 19
What to do in an emergency
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the compact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
6 20
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car components may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION - One sealant
bottle for one
tire
The Tire Mobility Kit sealing
compound in the bottle is to be
used for one tire only. See your
Kia dealership for additional
replacement sealant bottles.
OYFH062021N
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Tire Mobility Kit bag
(2) Compressor
(3) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING - Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.
WARNING - Temporary fix
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may loose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tire Mobility
Kit.
OEL069019
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails or
similar objects and reinflates the tire.
After you ensured that the tire is properly sealed you can drive cautiously
on the tire (up to 120 miles (200 km))
at a max. speed of 50 mph (80 km/h)
in order to reach a service station or
tire dealer to have the tire repaired or
replaced.
6 21
What to do in an emergency
It is possible that some tires, especially
with larger punctures or damage to the
sidewall, cannot be sealed completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is
heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step procedure to temporarily seal
the puncture.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
6 22
Notes on the safe use of the Tire
Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pressure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below 22°F (-30°C).
What to do in an emergency
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
expiration date noted on the
sealant bottle. This can increase
the risk of tire failure.
OEL069020
Components of the TireMobilityKit
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
WARNING - Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
Strictly
follow
the
specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
6 23
What to do in an emergency
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1.Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driver
not to drive too fast.
2.Screw connection hose (9) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3.Ensure that button (8) on the compressor is not pressed.
4.Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (2) of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5.Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor (4)so
that the bottle is upright.
✽ NOTICE
If a foreign object is seen that has
punctured the tire, do not remove it
before using Tire Mobility Kit.
6 24
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 29 PSI(200kpa). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
OEL069019
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7. Connect between compressor and
the vehicle power outlet using the
cable and connectors.
8. With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tire
and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the tire
and stay away from the tire when
filling it.
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation is possible if the
engine is left running in a poorly
ventilated or unventilated location (such as inside a building).
What to do in an emergency
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
4~6miles (7~10km or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensor valve stem
and wheel may be stained by
sealant. After use wipe off sealant
resdue and inspect. Consult you Kia
dealership if necessary.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
1.After driving approximately 4 ~ 6
miles (7 ~ 10 km or about 10 min),
stop at a safe location.
2.Connect connection hose (9) of the
compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3.Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition switch on, proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pressure : Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
✽ NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire reading, the compressor needs to be turned off.
- To reduce the inflation pressure: Press the button 8 on the
compressor.
6 25
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by Kia, the tire pressure sensors may be damaged
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel
should be removed when you
replace the tire with a new one
and inspect the tire pressure
sensors at an authorized dealer.
6 26
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-22 ~ +158°F (-30 ~ +70°C)
Max. working pressure:
87 psi (6 bar)
Size
Compressor: 6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.
(168 x 150 x 68 mm)
Sealant bottle: 4.1 x ø 3.3 in.
(104 x ø 85 mm)
Compressor weight:
2.31 lbs (1.05 kg)
Sealant volume:
18.3 cu. in. (300 ml)
Sealant warranty:
5 years (sealant.)
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.
A
B
OED066013
dolly
OED066011
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck
service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage
to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
OED066014
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
6 27
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION - Towing gear
position
Always place the transaxle shift
lever in Neutral (N) when towing
your vehicle. Failure to place the
transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral)
may cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
6 28
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-3
Owner maintenance / 7-5
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-7
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-19
Engine oil / 7-22
Engine coolant / 7-23
Brake/clutch fluid / 7-26
Washer fluid / 7-27
Parking brake / 7-28
Air cleaner / 7-29
Climate control air filter / 7-31
Wiper blades / 7-33
Battery / 7-36
Tires and wheels / 7-39
Fuses / 7-53
Maintenance
Light bulbs / 7-63
Appearance care / 7-75
Emission control system / 7-81
California perchlorate notice / 7-84
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ 2.4L Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
■ 2.0L Engine
5. Fuse box
6. Positive battery terminal
7. Negative battery terminal
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OTF070002/OYF071200N
7 2
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized Kia dealer perform
this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factorytrained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see an
authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance
with the scheduled maintenance service
charts shown on the following pages.
You need this information to establish
your compliance with the servicing and
maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty & Consumer
Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. An authorized Kia dealer
meets Kia’s high service quality standards and receives technical support
from Kia in order to provide you with a
high level of service satisfaction.
7 3
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an
authorized Kia dealer with special tools.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Warranty & Consumer Information
manual provided with the vehicle. If
you're unsure about any servicing or
maintenance procedure, have it done by
an authorized Kia dealer.
7 4
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose clothing while working under the hood
of your vehicle with the engine running. These can become entangled
in moving parts, if you must run the
engine while working under the
hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially rings,
bracelets, watches, and necklaces)
and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting
near the engine or cooling fans.
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at
the frequencies indicated to help ensure
safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING - Hot coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hardto-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).
7 5
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
7 6
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check the radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check the windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean the wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened with
washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean the body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and check
the hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, follow the Maintenance Under Severe
Usage Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 90°F
(32°C).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After 120 months or 150,000 miles continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.
7 7
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
(Continued)
3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.0 T-GDI)
(At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that,
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.)
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
air cleaner filter
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Add fuel additive *3
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
(Continued)
7 8
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Add fuel additive *3
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect suspension mounting bolts
Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
Inspect fuel filter *1
Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
Replace air cleaner filter
37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
Kia dealer for details.
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
7 9
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
air cleaner filter
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), 2.0 T-GDI
7 10
52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect valve clearance *2
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but
periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends
on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel
filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.
*2 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
7 11
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
air cleaner filter
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
7 12
82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but
periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends
on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel
filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), 2.0 T-GDI
7 13
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
air cleaner filter
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), 2.4 GDI
(First, 105,000 miles or 84 months after every 105,000 miles or 84
months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
7 14
112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect valve clearance *2
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but
periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends
on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel
filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.
*2 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
7 15
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
air cleaner filter
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), 2.0 T-GDI
7 16
142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
vacuum hose
air conditioning refrigerant
brake hoses and lines
drive shafts and boots
exhaust pipe and muffler
front disc brake/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect rear disc brake/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect drive belt (auto-tensioner, generator, p/str'g, a/con, w/pump)
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but
periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends
on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel
filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *3
7 17
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart
below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDITION
2.4L
R
EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
2.0L
R
EVERY 3,000 MILES (5,000 KM) OR 3 MONTHS
AIR CLEANER FILTER
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, E
SPARK PLUGS
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
A, B, H, I, K
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
R
EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)
A, C, E, F, G, I
MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID
R
EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM)
A, C, E, F, G, I
FRONT DISC BRAKE/PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, G, H
REAR DISC BRAKE/PADS, PARKING BRAKE
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
I
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, E
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal
temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
7 18
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
Fuel filter
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized Kia dealer.
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as necessary.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have
an authorized Kia dealer replace any
damaged or leaking parts immediately.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
7 19
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
Coolant
Brake hoses and lines
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Valve clearance
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
An authorized Kia dealer should perform
the operation.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components, such
as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid should
be changed at an authorized Kia dealer
in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
7 20
Brake/clutch fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Maintenance
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake pedal and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,
or damage. Start the engine and listen
carefully for any exhaust gas leakage.
Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
7 21
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
■ 2.4 engine
■ 2.4 engine
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
OYF079003N
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
■ 2.0 engine
OYF079004N
■ 2.0 engine
CAUTION - Replace engine
oil
Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
OYF071003N-1
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully.
7 22
OYF071004N-1
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
WARNING - California
proposition 65
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer, birth defects and
reproductive harm. Used engine oil
may cause irritation or cancer of
the skin if left in contact with the
skin for prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with
soap and warm water as soon as
possible after handling used oil.
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when working near the blade of the
cooling fan. The electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine
coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure and vehicle speed. It may
sometimes operate even when the
engine is not running.
OTF070006
Checking the coolant level
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
7 23
Maintenance
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If frequent coolant addition is required, see an
authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
7 24
For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.
■ Type A
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Ambient
Temperature
Antifreeze
Water
5°F (-15°C)
35
65
-13°F (-25°C)
40
60
-31°F (-35°C)
50
50
-49°F (-45°C)
60
40
OTF070007
■ Type B
OTF072007
Maintenance
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pressure.
Turn the engine off and wait until it cools
down. Use care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it,
and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the pressure is
released from the cooling system. When
you are sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap, using a
thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.
Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
Put a thick cloth or fabric around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as the
alternator.
CAUTION - Removing radiator cap
Never attempt to remove
the radiator cap while
the engine is operating
or hot. Doing so might
lead to cooling system
and engine damage.
7 25
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake/clutch fluid in
brake/clutch
system.
Small
amounts of improper fluids (such
as engine oil) can cause damage to
the brake/clutch system.
OTF070008
Checking the brake/clutch* fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean the area
around the reservoir cap thoroughly to
prevent brake/clutch* fluid contamination.
* if equipped
7 26
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings
and/or clutch disc (if equipped). If the
fluid level is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch* system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch* fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake/clutch* system
requires frequent additions of fluid, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
When changing and adding brake/clutch*
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come
in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch*
fluid should come in contact with your
eyes, immediately flush them with a large
quantity of fresh tap water. Have your
eyes examined by a doctor as soon as
possible.
CAUTION - Brake/clutch
fluid
Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid to
contact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly.
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
WARNING - Windshield
fluid
Do not drink the windshield washer
fluid. The windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and animals.
WARNING - Flammable
fluid
OTF070010
Checking the washer fluid level
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open flames
or sparks. The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is flammable under
certain circumstances. This can
result in a fire.
7 27
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTF050015
Checking the parking brake
Type A
Check whether the stroke is within specification when the parking brake pedal is
depressed with 44 lb (20 kg, 196 N) of
force. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade.
OTF050014
Type B
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
while fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of 44 lbs
(20 kg, 196 N).
7 28
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
OTF070011
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
OTF070012
OYF079013
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
7 29
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended
intervals.
(Refer
to
“Maintenance under severe usage conditions” in this section.)
7 30
CAUTION - Air filter
maintenance
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
nongenuine part could damage
the air flow sensor.
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced according to the Maintenance
Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier. When you replace the
climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other components.
OTF070014
OTF070013
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box.
OTF070015
2. Remove the climate control air filter
cover while pressing the lock on the
right side of the cover.
3. Push the right side of the climate control air filter and pull the climate control
air filter out.
7 31
Maintenance
OMG079027
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
When replacing the climate control air filter install it properly. Otherwise, the system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.
7 32
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
1JBA5122
Blade inspection
Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, do not attempt to
move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper blade
could result in wiper malfunction and failure.
CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
7 33
Maintenance
■ Type A
■ Type B
1JBA7037
1LDA5023
OED070112
Front windshield wiper blade
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
7 34
✽ NOTICE
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield
1JBA7038
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Maintenance
OED070113
OED070114
2. Open the cover of the blade.
3. Compress the clip behind the wiper
arm and lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly until it clicks
into place
5. Close the cover of blade.
6. Return the wiper arm to the proper
position.
7 35
Maintenance
BATTERY
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and all
other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
The battery contains hydrogen -- a highly combustible
gas which will explode if it
comes in contact with a
flame or spark.
OTF070016
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
7 36
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
in batteries
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID
and electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
Always read the following
instructions carefully when handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into your
eyes, flush your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 minutes and
get immediate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the contacted
area. If you feel pain or burning
sensation, get medical attention
immediately.
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
The battery contains lead. Do
not dispose of it after use.
Please return the battery to an
authorized Kia dealer to be recycled.
Maintenance
Battery recharging
WARNING - Recharging
battery
Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are
connected.
When you don’t use the vehicle for a long
time in the low temperature area, separate the battery and keep it indoors.
WARNING - California
WARNING - Risk of electrocution
Never touch the electrical ignition
system while the vehicle is running. This system works with high
voltage which can "zap" you.
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 2030A for two hours.
proposition 65
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known
to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer. Wash
hands after handling.
7 37
Maintenance
When recharging the battery, observe
the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from the
vehicle and placed in an area with
good ventilation.
• Watch the battery during charging, and
stop or reduce the charging rate if the
battery cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature of the
electrolyte of any cell exceeds 120°F
(49°C).
• Wear eye protection when checking
the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in the
following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from the
negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from the
positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last when
the battery is disconnected.
7 38
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
WARNING - Tire underin-
OMG055004
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
flation
Inflate your tires consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe underinflation
(10 psi (70 kPa) or more) can
lead to severe heat build-up,
causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that
can result in the loss of vehicle
control. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
7 39
Maintenance
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 4
to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
7 40
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than one
mile (1.6 km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You can not tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
7 41
Maintenance
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
Do not use the compact spare tire for
tire rotation.
Without a spare tire
WARNING - Mixing tire
S2BLA790A
Directional tires (if equipped)
CBGQ0707A
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
7 42
types
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
Maintenance
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. Tire size can
affect wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) (if equipped) to
work irregularly.
Tread wear indicator
OEN076053
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.
7 43
Maintenance
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height.
CAUTION - Wheel
Wheels that do not meet Kia's
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
7 44
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road, to
reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
1
5,6
7
4
2
3
1
I030B04JM
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P205/55R16 89H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
89 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX16
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicles. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z
Maximum Speed
112 mph (180 km/h)
118 mph (190 km/h)
130 mph (210 km/h)
149 mph (240 km/h)
Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
7 45
Maintenance
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1609 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2009.
7 46
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recommended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
4. Tire ply composition and material
6. Maximum load rating
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
Maintenance
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 440
TRACTION A
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging
process.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
7 47
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
7 48
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories
are,
automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Maintenance
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
7 49
Maintenance
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.
7 50
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.
Maintenance
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the front wheels.
Be sure that the chains are installed
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
• When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, drive at less than
20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE “S” class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by chains
contacting the body, retighten the
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retighten
the chains after driving 0.3~0.6
miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels.
In unavoidable circumstances, use
a wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59
inches (15 mm) to prevent damage
to the chain’s connection.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are
of belted construction and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
7 51
Maintenance
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
7 52
Maintenance
FUSES
Blade type
Normal
Blown
Cartridge type
Normal
Blown
Multi fuse
Normal
Blown
Main fuse
Normal
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one located in the driver’s side panel bolster, the
other in the engine compartment near
the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will
melt.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.
WARNING - Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION - Fuse replacement
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
Blown
OLM079051N
7 53
Maintenance
If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse block in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
OTF070018
OTF070019
Instrument panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigar lighter fuse.
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory
fuse to prevent battery discharge if your
vehicle is parked without being operated
for prolonged periods. Use the following
procedures before parking the vehicle for
prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull up the memory fuse.
7 54
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION - Fuse panel
• If the memory fuse is pulled up from
the fuse panel, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be
reset after replacement. Refer to
“Battery” in this section.
• Even when the memory fuse is pulled
up, the battery can still be discharged
by operation of the headlights or other
electrical devices.
covers
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover to prevent electrical failures which may
occur from water leaking in.
OTF070020
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the tap and pulling up the cover.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
7 55
Maintenance
OTF070021
OVG079022
OTF070022
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Remove the fuse panel in the engine
compartment.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
If the button starting fuse is blown, it must
be removed as follows:
1. Open the cover in the engine compartment.
2. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
3. Close the cover.
7 56
If the multi or starting fuse is blown, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Instrument panel fuse panel
Engine compartment fuse panel
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
* : if equipped
Engine room (Button starting BOX)*
Engine room (Battery terminal cover)
OTF070023/OTF070026/OVG079025L/OVG079026
7 57
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name
MODULE 3
PDM 1
POWER OUTLET
MODULE 5
MODULE 2
TRUNK
Fuse rating
7.5A
25A
15A
7.5A
7.5A
10A
Circuit Protected
Key Solenoid, Sport Mode Switch
Smart Key Control Module
Front Power Outlet
Smart Key Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Relay LH/RH
BCM, Panorama Sunroof, Rain Sensor
I/P Junction Box (Trunk Relay), Fuel Filler Door & Trunk Lid Switch, Trunk Room LP
CLOCK
10A
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio, Smart Key Control Module, Overhead Console Lamp,
Crash Pad Mood Lamp, A/C Control Module, BCM, AMP, Power Outside Mirror Switch,
Driver/Passenger Door Mood Lamp
C/LIGHTER
HTD STRG
A/CON
WIPER
S/HEATER FRT
MIRR HTD
15A
15A
7.5A
25A
20A
10A
Cigar Lighter
Steering Wheel Heater
A/C Control Module, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay)
Multifunction Switch, Front Wiper Motor, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper Relay, Rain SNSR Relay)
Driver/Passenger CCS Cushion Warmer, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module
Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
MODULE 4
7.5A
Front Seat Warmer & CCS Switch, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module,
Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Audio
A/BAG IND
7.5A
Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)
START
7.5A
W/O Smart Key : Burglar Alarm Relay
With Smart Key : PCM, Transaxle Range Switch
S/HEATER RR
P/SEAT PASS
FOG LP RR
15A
20A
15A
Rear Seat Warmer Relay LH/RH
Passenger Seat Manual Switch
-
7 58
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
MODULE 1
7.5A
Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module,
Driver IMS Module, ATM Lever Indicator, BCM, A/C Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror,
Lane Keeping Assist Module, Instrument Cluster
VACUUM PUMP
A/BAG
P/WDW LH
AMP
PDM 2
MDPS
PDM 3
P/WDW RH
P/SEAT DRV
20A
15A
25A
30A
7.5A
10A
7.5A
25A
30A
Vacuum Pump, Vacuum Switch
Telltale Lamp, SRS Control Module, Passenger Weight Classification Sensor
I/P Junction Box (Power Window LH Relay), Driver/Passenger Power Window Safety Module
AMP
Start Stop Button Switch, Smart Key Control Module, Fob Holder
EPS Control Module, Crash Pad Switch
Smart Key Control Module
I/P Junction Box (Power Window RH Relay)
Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver Lumbar Support Switch
DR LOCK
20A
Two Turn Unlock Relay, I/P Junction Box (Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay,
Turn Signal Lamp Sound Relay)
SUNROOF
IG 1
20A
20A
15A
Panorama Sunroof
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse : ABS 3 10A, TCU 2 15A, ECU 4 10A)
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio
10A
Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Driver IMS Module, Lamp Auto Cut Relay,
Driver/Passenger Door Scuff Lamp, Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, A/C Control Module,
Data Link Connector, RF Receiver, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror, Instrument Cluster,
Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module
AUDIO
POWER
CONNECTOR ROOM LP
7 59
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Fuse Name
MULTI
FUSE
FUSE
7 60
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
IP B+ 2
60A
I/P Junction Box (P/SEAT DRV 30A, P/SEAT PASS 20A, AMP 30A, PDM 2 7.5A, IPS 5, IPS 6,
ARISU 2)
SPARE
IGN 2
ABS 1
60A
40A
40A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay), Fuse & Relay Box (PDM 3(IG 2) Relay), Ignition Switch
ESC Module
RR HTD (G4KJ)/
C/FAN HI (G4KH)
40A/60A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RR HTD Relay) (G4KJ)
C/FAN (HI) Relay (G4KH)
BLOWER
40A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay)
IP B+ 1
60A
I/P Junction Box (PDM 1 25A, MODULE 3 7.5A, S/HEATER FRT 20A, S/HEATER RR 15A
TRUNK 10A, P/WDW LH 25A, P/WDW RH 25A), Power Connector (AUDIO 15A))
MDPS
WIPER
RR HTD IND
BRAKE SWITCH
AMS
TCU 1
STOP LAMP
DEICER
C/FAN
ABS 2
RR THD (G4KH)
80A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
40A
30A
40A
EPS Control Module
PCM
A/C Control Module
Stop Lamp Switch Signal
Battery Sensor
PCM
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (HAC Relay), Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Deicer Relay)
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (C/Fan(HI) Relay, C/Fan(LO) Relay)
Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Module
RR HTD Relay (G4KH)
Maintenance
Fuse Name
FUSE
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
IP B+ 3
50A
I/P Junction Box (Power Connector (ROOM LP 10A), SUNROOF 20A, DR LOCK 20A IPS 1,
IPS 3, ARISU 1)
IGN 1
EMS
ECU 4
TCU 2
40A
40A
10A
15A
Fuse & Relay Box (PDM 1(ACC) Relay, PDM 2(IG 1) Relay), Ignition Switch
EMS Box (HORN 15A, ECU 3 10A, ECU 1 30A, F/PUMP 20A)
PCM
Back-Up Lamp Switch, Vehicle Speed Sensor, Transaxle Range Switch
ABS 3
10A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (HAC Relay), Stop Lamp Switch, ESC Module,
Multipurpose Check Connector
B/UP LAMP
10A
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio, Electro Chromic Mirror, BCM,
Rear Combination Lamp(In) LH/RH
A/CON
10A
A/C Control Module
7 61
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel (EMS BOX)
Fuse Name
HORN
F/PUMP
ECU 3
SENSOR 1
INJECTOR
SENSOR 3
Fuse rating
15A
20A
15A
15A
10A
10A
Circuit Protected
EMS Box (Horn Relay), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (B/Horn Relay)
EMS Box (F/Pump Relay)
PCM
Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (C/FAN (HI/LO) Relay)
EMS Box (F/Pump Relay)
Camshaft Position Sensor #1, #2, Immobilizer Module
SENSOR 2
10A
RCV Control Solenoid Valve(G4KH), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve(G4KJ),
Canister Close Valve Oil Control Valve #1, #2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve,
Crankshaft Position Sensor
IGN COIL
ECU 1
20A
30A
Condenser, Ignition Coil #1, #2, #3, #4
EMS Box (Engine Control Relay)
7 62
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
WARNING - Lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position and turn off
the lights to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
CAUTION - Light
replacement
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
If you don’t have necessary tools, the
correct bulbs and the expertise, consult
an authorized Kia dealer. In many cases,
it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle must
be removed before you can get to the
bulb. This is especially true if you have to
remove the headlight assembly to get to
the bulb(s). Removing/installing the
headlight assembly can result in damage
to the vehicle.
7 63
Maintenance
OHD076046
OTF070027N
Headlight, position light, turn signal light, side marker light and
front fog light bulb replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Side marker
(4) Front turn signal light/
Front position light
(5) Front fog light*
* : if equipped
7 64
Headlight bulb
WARNING - Halogen bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
Halogen bulbs contain pressurized
gas that will produce flying pieces
of glass if broken.
Always handle them carefully, and avoid
scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are
lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands. Residual oil
may cause the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked,
replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.
Wear eye protection when changing a
bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before
handling it.
Maintenance
If the headlight aiming adjustment is necessary after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled, consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
OEN076051
Headlight (bulb type)
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlight bulb socketconnector.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
6. Install a new headlight bulb.
7. Connect the headlight bulb socketconnector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.
7 65
Maintenance
Front side marker
Front turn signal light
OTF070065/OTF070066/OTF070067
7 66
OTF070068/OTF070050N/OTF070051N
Front side marker/Front turn signal
light
Front side marker
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood
3. Remove the intake folder and screws.
4. Remove the bumper cover and under
pad by rotating the screw.
5. Remove the nuts of headlamp assembly.
6. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the
socket and rotating it until it locks into
place.
9. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
10. Reinstall the headlamp assembly,
under pad and bumper to the body of
the vehicle.
Maintenance
Front turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the
socket and rotating it until it locks into
place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
OTF070029
Side repeater light bulb replacement
Type A
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
OTF070048N
Type B
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Remove the light assembly from the
vehicle by prying the assembly and
pulling the assembly out.
3. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.
4. Separate the socket and the lens parts
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the lens part.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
6. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
7. Reassemble the socket and the lens
part.
8. Connect the bulb electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
7 67
Maintenance
■ Type A
CAUTION
When you remove the side repeater
cover, be careful not to damage the
side repeater cover and vehicle surface.
OTF070030
OTF070069
Front fog light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Remove the under cover by rotating
the screws.
3. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
4. Disconnect the power connector.
5. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
6. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
7. Connect the power connector.
8. Reinstall the front under cover.
7 68
■ Type B
OTF070047
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Tail light
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Back-up light
(5) Rear side marker
Maintenance
Type B
If the light (LED) does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Stop and tail light / Rear turn signal light
Rear side marker
Stop and tail light / Rear turn signal
light / Rear side marker
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the trunk.
3. Open the service cover.
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the
socket and rotating it until it locks into
place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Install the service cover by pulling it
into the service hole.
OTF070031/OTF070032/OTF070032N
7 69
Maintenance
Backup light-1
OTF070033
OTF070054
OTF070033
OTF070052
OTF070055
OTF070037
Backup light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the trunk.
3. Loosen the retaining screw of the trunk
lid cover and then remove the cover.
4. Disconnect the cable and then remove
the nuts by turning the nuts counter
clockwise.
5. Take the light assembly out.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the
socket.
7. Install the light assembly to the trunk.
8. Reinstall the nuts and connector and
then the trunk lid cover by pushing in
the screw.
Backup light
7 70
Backup light-2
License plate light bulb replacement
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the trunk.
3. Loosen the retaining screw of the trunk
lid cover and then remove the cover.
4. Take out the light.
Maintenance
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the
socket.
6. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by pushing
in the screw.
OTF070057N
OTF070036
High mounted stop light replacement
OTF070058N
High mounted bulb
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Push the seat up.
3. Remove the nuts under the seat connecting each side of the seat. And take
each side seat out.
7 71
Maintenance
4. Type A
Fold the seat back by pulling out the
lock release knob (1). Fold the seatback forward and down firmly. (if
equipped)
■ Type A
OTF030020
■ Type B
Type B
Push the seat back up. The seat back
is connected to the hook attached to
package tray. (if equipped)
OTF070059N
OTFH070074N
OTF070060N
5. Take the C-pillar out carefully. If you
pull the C-pillar strongly, it will be
broken.
6. Disconnect the cable attached on the
panel.
OTF030021
7 72
Maintenance
10. Reinstall all package tray, cable and
side seat. Lift and push the seat back
backward firmly until it clicks into
place.
11. Reinstall the seat by pushing it down
firmly.
OTF070061N
OTF070062N
7. Remove the screws and package tray.
8. Remove the fabric and nuts.
9. Change the HMSL to a new one.
7 73
Maintenance
Front map lamp
Vanity mirror lamp
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
WARNING
Room lamp
Luggage room lamp
■ Type A
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” button is pressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
Glove box lamp
■ Type B
OTF070038/OTF070039/OTF070040
7 74
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
OVG079040/OTF070041/OTF070042
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
CAUTION - Headlight Lens
To prevent damage, do not clean
headlight lens with chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each offroad trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, test the brakes
while driving slowly to see if they have
been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while maintaining a
slow forward speed.
7 75
Maintenance
OJB037800
CAUTION - Wetting engine
• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure
water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
7 76
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Maintenance
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleaners containing
acid or acid detergents. It may damage
and corrode the aluminum wheels
coated with a clear protective finish.
7 77
Maintenance
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corrosion, we produces vehicles of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle
is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly
important. Some of the common causes
of accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
7 78
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the vehicle surfaces by
moisture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it
dries slowly and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle
clean and free of mud or accumulations
of other materials. This applies not only
to the visible surfaces but particularly to
the underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your vehicle
at least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
Maintenance
• When cleaning underneath the vehicle,
give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your vehicle
in the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting and cause corrosion.
Check under the mats periodically to be
sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular
care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning
materials or chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting
the dashboard because they may cause
damage or discoloration. If they do contact the dashboard, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions for the proper way to clean vinyl.
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liquids
to
come
in
contact
with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.
7 79
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.
7 80
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Rear windows
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Warranty &
Consumer Information manual in your
vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable
emission regulations.
There are three emission control systems, as follows.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing the
ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase. This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
2. Evaporative emission control
(including ORVR: Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery)
system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle
inspected and maintained by an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in this manual.
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to allow
the vapors from the fuel tank to be
loaded into a canister while refueling at
the gas station, preventing the escape of
fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)
7 81
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
7 82
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorized electronic
devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic converter and exhaust system while
the vehicle is running or immediately thereafter. The exhaust and
catalytic systems are very hot and
may burn you.
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. A hot
exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
7 83
Maintenance
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as
air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners
and keyless remote entry batteries, must
be disposed of according to Title 22
California Code of Regulations Section
67384.10 (a).
7 84
Engine / 8-2
Dimensions / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-3
Tires and wheels / 8-4
Weight/volume / 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-8
Vehicle certification label / 8-8
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-9
Engine number / 8-9
Refrigerant label / 8-9
Consumer assistance / 8-10
Electrical equipment / 8-12
Reporting safety defects / 8-13
Online factory authorized manuals / 8-14
Specifications, Consumer information,
Reporting safety defects
8
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
ENGINE
Item
2.4 GDI
2.0 T-GDI
Displacement [cu.in(cc)]
143.96 cu.in (2359 cc)
121.92 cu.in (1998 cc)
3.46 x 3.46 in
(86 x 86 mm)
3.46 x 3.82 mm
(88 x 97 mm)
1→3→4→2
1→3→4→2
4, In-line
4, In-line
Bore x Stroke [in(mm)]
Firing order
No. of cylinders
DIMENSIONS
Item
in. (mm)
Overall length
190.7 (4845)
Overall width
72.0 (1830)
Overall height
57.3 (1455)
Front tread
63.0 (1601)*1/62.8 (1595)*2/62.6 (1591)*3
Rear tread
63.0 (1601)*1/62.8 (1595)*2/62.6 (1591)*3
Wheelbase
110.0 (2795)
*1 : with R16 tire
*2 : with R17 tire
*3 : with R18 tire
8 2
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb
Wattage
Bulb Type
Headlights (Low)
55 or 35 (HID)
H11B/D1S
Headlights (High)
55
H1
Front turn signal
27
27/8W
Front side marker
5
W5W
Position light
8
8W
5/LED
WY5W
35
H8
27/8 or LED
27W
27
27W
Back-up light
16 or 18
16 & 18W
Rear side marker
5 or LED
W5W
LED
·
License plate light
5
W5W
Front map lamp*
10
10W
Center room lamp
10
10W
Trunk room lamp*
5
C5W
Rear room lamp*
10
10W
Side repeater light*
Front fog light*
Stop and tail light
Rear turn signal light
High mounted stop light
* : if equipped
8 3
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
TIRES AND WHEELS
Inflation pressure
Tire
Item
Full size tire
Compact
spare tire
size
Wheel size
Normal load
Maximum load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
P205/65R16 94H
6.5J×16
225 (33)
225 (33)
225 (33)
225 (33)
P215/55R17 93V
6.5J×17
225 (33)
225 (33)
225 (33)
225 (33)
225/45R18 95V
7.5J×18
240 (35)
240 (35)
240 (35)
240 (35)
420
420
420
420
(60)
(60)
(60)
(60)
T125/80D16 97M
4.0T×16
T135/80D17 103M
4.0T×17
* Normal load : Up to 3 persons
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can
damage the related parts or make it
work irregularly.
8 4
Wheel lug nut torque
kPa (psi)
*1
420
420
420
420
(60)
(60)
(60)
(60)
lb•ft (kg•m, N•m)
65~79
(9~11, 88~107)
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
WEIGHT/VOLUME
Item
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg)
Luggage volume
cu ft (l)
2.4 GDI
2.0 T-GDI
M/T
A/T
4300 lbs.
(1950 kg)
4497 lbs.
(2040 kg)
15.43 cu ft (437 l)
8 5
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant
Engine oil
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Volume
Classification
4.86 US qt. (4.6 l)
API Service SM*3,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
1.90 US qt. (1.8 l)
API GL-4, SAE 75W/85, fill for-life
or other brands meeting the GL-4 specitication
approved by Kia Motors Corp.
*1 *2
Manual transaxle fluid
2.0 T-GDI
8.24 US qt. (7.8 l)
2.4 GDI
7.50 US qt. (7.1 l)
2.0 T-GDI
6.87 ~ 6.97 US qt.
(6.5 ~ 6.6 l)
2.4 GDI
7.18 US qt. (6.8 l)
Automatic transaxle fluid
Coolant
Brake/clutch fluid
Fuel
0.7~0.8 US qt.
(0.7~0.8 l)
18.49 US gal. (70 l)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV, Kia genuine ATF SP-IV or other
brands meeting the above specification approved by
Kia MOTORS CORP
Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol base
coolant for aluminum radiator)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Unleaded gasoline
* Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
1
8 6
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area around
any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick
before checking or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in dusty or
sandy areas and when the vehicle is
used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the
plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operation (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.
Temperature
Engine Oil
(2.0 T-GDI)
Engine Oil
(2.4 GDI) *1
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
50
120
5W-30, 5W-40
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
*1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if
the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8 7
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
VIN Label (if equipped)
OTF080001
OVQ076002N
OTF080002
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to
its ownership, etc.
VIN label
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
The vehicle certification label attatched
on the driver’s side center pillar gives the
vehicle identification number (VIN).
8 8
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
REFRIGERANT LABEL
■ 2.4 engine
OTF080004
■ 2.0 engine
OTFH081005N
OMG055004
The refrigerant label is located on the
underside of the hood.
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
OYF081013N
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
8 9
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)
Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current model year
Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is delivered to the first
retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to the terms, conditions and exclusions set
forth in the Kia Warranty and Consumer Information Manual
applicable to your model year vehicle.
KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment, the claims
and/or service requests are excessive in frequency or type of
occurrence.
Toll free consumer assistance
Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed from 5:00
AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday and is accessible
by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).
For more information regarding assistance available, please
refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer Information Manual.
Emergency roadside assistance
Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing 1-800-3334Kia (4542).
Please note that you must provide your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time of your call. The
VIN can be found on the dash of your vehicle on the driver’s
side, on the door jamb of the driver’s door, your vehicle’s registration or proof of insurance card.
8 10
Kia utilizes a network of over 17,000 roadside assistance
providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia Roadside
Assistance Representative will dispatch someone to deliver a
small quantity of gas, change a flat tire with your inflated spare,
or arrange a battery jump to allow you to proceed to your destination. We have access to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths
to help you should you become locked out of your Kia.
In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehicle
undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s Roadside
Assistance Representative will arrange to transport your vehicle
to the nearest Kia dealer or to an alternative service location.
Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this service.
✽ NOTICE
Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any Kia
vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “salvage” title
or similar “branded” title under any state’s law or has been
declared a “total loss” or equivalent by a financial institution
or insurance company.
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Trip interruption
Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the event that
a warranty-related disablement occurs more than 150 miles
from your home, and the repairs require more than 24 hours to
complete. Reasonable reimbursement is included for meals,
lodging, or rental car expenses. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100 per day subject to a three day maximum limit per
incident. You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center
to obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia Roadside
Assistance Center gives authorization for trip interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the necessary arrangements.
Insurance deductibles, expenses, and claims paid by your
insurance company or other providers are not eligible for reimbursement.
Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under Kia’s
Trip Interruption Policy.
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country
If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country, you
should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle in a foreign
country, you may experience the following problems and should
therefore consider the possibility of having to deal with them:
1. The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable. If other
than the specified fuel is used, it could cause damage to the
engine, the fuel injection system, and other fuel-related parts
which may not be covered under your New Vehicle Emissions
Limited Warranty.
2. We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave the
country in which you purchased your Kia new and register it
in another country, problems arising from the use of fuel other
than the specified fuel are not subject to manufacturer’s warranty. Because vehicles like yours may not be marketed in the
new country of registration, parts, servicing techniques and
tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical specifications required by the government may vary enough from
the country of purchase to cause additional problems.
3. There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area in
which you plan to register your vehicle. You may additionally
experience difficulty in obtaining services in a foreign country
for any number of reasons.
Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for problems that
result from unsatisfactory service or lack of service outside of
the United States.
8 11
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)
The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to perform
under all reasonably expected operating conditions.
However,before any additional electrical equipment is installed
in your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer, in order to
ensure that you do not void your warranty.
Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is installed,
may adversely affect the operation of your vehicle, includingsuch systems as the engine control system, the audio system
and the electrical charging system and thus potentially void all
or part of your warranty.
We assume no responsibility for any expense you may incur or
for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its components or
systems that may result from the installation of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied, or recommended for installation by, Kia.
8 12
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly, or if an
excessively powerful type of system is used, other electronic
systems may be adversely affected. To avoid damage to your
vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer concerning the proper equipment and installation.
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or
exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particularly the information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and
"WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding
the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and defects please
contact your Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line as
below:
National Consumer Affairs Manager
Kia Motors America, Inc.
P.O. Box 52410
Irvine, CA 92619-2410
1-800-333-4Kia (4542)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia
Motors America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors
America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, SE., West
Building Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
8 13
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS (U.S. ONLY)
The following publications are available on www.KiaTechinfo.com
at no charge.
Service manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple enough for most
mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Electrical troubleshooting manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by providing
indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in
your vehicle.
Owner's manual:
This manual describes the overall features and operating procedures for the vehicle.
8 14
Index
I
Index
A
Active eco ······································································5-36
Air bags··········································································3-35
Air bag warning label··················································3-57
Air bag warning light ··················································3-38
Curtain air bag ·····························································3-49
Driver's and passenger's front air bag··························3-45
Occupant detection system··········································3-40
Side impact air bag······················································3-48
SRS components and functions···································3-38
Air cleaner ·····································································7-29
Alarm system ·································································4-10
Antenna (Glass) ···························································4-119
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ······································5-24
Appearance care·····························································7-75
Exterior care ································································7-75
Interior care ·································································7-79
Audio system ·······························································4-119
Glass antenna·····························································4-119
Steering wheel audio control·····································4-120
Aux, USB and iPod port············································4-121
Auto defogging system················································4-119
Automatic climate control system ·······························4-101
Air conditioning ························································4-107
Automatic heating and air conditioning····················4-102
Manual heating and air conditioning·························4-103
I 2
Automatic transaxle ·······················································5-15
Ignition key interlock system ······································5-20
Paddle shifter ·······························································5-18
Shift lock system ·························································5-19
Sports mode ·································································5-17
Aux, USB and iPod port··············································4-121
B
Battery············································································7-36
Battery saver function····················································4-81
Before driving ··································································5-3
Bottle holders, see cup holders····································4-115
Brake system··································································5-21
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ····································5-24
Electronic stability control (ESC) ·······························5-26
Parking brake·······························································5-22
Power brakes································································5-21
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ····································5-29
Vehicle stability management······································5-30
Brakes/clutch fluid·························································7-26
Bulb replacement ···························································7-64
Bulb wattage ····································································8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button·················5-6
Index
C
California perchlorate notice ·········································7-84
Capacities (Lubricants)····················································8-6
Care
Exterior care ································································7-75
Interior care ·································································7-79
Tire care·······································································7-39
Cargo weight··································································5-52
Center console storage·················································4-113
Central door lock switch················································4-15
Certification label ····························································8-8
Chains
Tire chains ···································································5-44
Changing tires································································6-14
Checking tire inflation pressure·····································7-40
Child restraint system ····················································3-27
Tether anchor system···················································3-31
Lower anchor system···················································3-32
Child-protector rear door lock ·······································4-16
Climate control air filter ················································4-99
Climate control air filter ················································7-31
Clock (Digital) ·····························································4-117
Clothes hanger ·····························································4-118
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ···············4-49
Compact spare tire ·························································6-13
Compact spare tire replacement ····································7-43
Compass mirror, see the Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with homeLink system and compass···························4-39
Consumer assistance······················································8-10
Cool box·······································································4-114
Coolant···········································································7-23
Crankcase emission control system·······························7-81
Cruise control system ····················································5-32
Cup holder ···································································4-115
Curtain air bag ·······························································3-49
D
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination··································································4-50
Dashboard, see instrument cluster ·································4-49
Defogging (Windshield) ··············································4-109
Defogging logic (Windshield) ·····································4-111
Defroster (Rear window) ···············································4-91
Digital clock·································································4-117
Dimensions ······································································8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination··································································4-50
Displays, see instrument cluster ····································4-49
Distance to service·························································4-56
Door locks······································································4-13
Central door lock switch ·············································4-15
Child-protector rear door lock·····································4-16
I 3
Index
Drinks holders, see cup holders···································4-115
Driver's 3-point system with evergency locking
retractor········································································3-19
Driver's air bag·······························································3-45
Driver's position memory system ··································4-34
Driving at night······························································5-40
Driving in flooded areas ················································5-41
Driving in the rain··························································5-41
E
Economical operation ····················································5-37
EDR, see vehicle data collection and event data
recorders ········································································1-5
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink system
and compass ································································4-39
Electric power steering ··················································4-36
Electrical equipment ······················································8-12
Electronic stability control (ESC) ·································5-26
Emergency starting ··························································6-4
Jump starting ·································································6-4
Push starting ··································································6-6
Emergency while driving·················································6-2
Emission control system················································7-81
Crankcase emission control system·····························7-81
Evaporative emission control System ·························7-81
Exhaust emission control system ································7-82
I 4
Engine compartment ················································2-4, 7-2
Engine coolant ·······························································7-23
Engine number·································································8-9
Engine oil·······································································7-22
Engine overheats······························································6-7
Engine start/stop button ···················································5-6
Engine temperature gauge ·············································4-51
Engine will not start·························································6-3
Evaporative emission control System ···························7-81
Exhaust emission control system ·································7-82
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ··············7-19
Exterior care···································································7-75
F
Flat tire···········································································6-13
Changing tires······························································6-14
Compact spare tire·······················································6-19
Jack and tools ······························································6-13
Removing and storing the spare tire····························6-13
Floor mat anchor(s) ·····················································4-118
Fluid
Washer fluid·································································7-27
Brakes/clutch fluid·······················································7-26
Folding the rear seat ······················································3-15
Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor ·····································3-19
Index
Front seat adjustment - manual ·······································3-4
Front seat adjustment - power ·········································3-6
Fuel filler lid ··································································4-27
Fuel gauge······································································4-51
Fuel requirements ····························································1-3
Fuses ··············································································7-53
Fuse/relay panel description········································7-57
Instrument panel fuse ··················································7-54
Multi fuse ····································································7-56
Memory fuse································································7-54
G
Gauge
Engine temperature gauge ···········································4-51
Fuel gauge ···································································4-51
Glass antenna ·······························································4-119
Glassroof, see Panorama sunroof ··································4-30
Glove box·····································································4-113
H
Hazard warning flasher··················································4-75
Hazardous driving conditions ········································5-39
Headlight bulb replacement···········································7-64
Headlight escort function···············································4-81
Headlight leveling device ··············································4-81
Headrest··································································3-8, 3-13
Highway driving ····························································5-42
Hill-start assist control (HAC)·······································5-29
Homelink mirror, see the electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with homelink system and compass····························4-39
Hood···············································································4-25
Horn ···············································································4-37
How to use this manual ···················································1-2
I
Ignition key interlock system ········································5-20
immobilizer system··························································4-8
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster ···················1-6
Indicators and warnings·················································4-60
Inside rearview mirror ···················································4-39
Instrument cluster ··························································4-49
Engine temperature gauge ···········································4-51
Fuel gauge ···································································4-51
Instrument panel illumination ·····································4-50
Odometer ·····································································4-52
I 5
Index
Speedometer ································································4-50
Tachometer ··································································4-50
Trip computer ······························································4-53
Distance to service·······················································4-54
Vehicle option······························································4-58
Warning and indicators················································4-60
Instrument panel illumination········································4-50
Instrument panel overview···············································2-3
Interior care····································································7-79
Interior features····························································4-115
Clothes hanger ···························································4-118
Cup holder ·································································4-115
Digital clock ······························································4-117
Floor mat anchor(s) ···················································4-118
Power outlet·······························································4-116
Sunvisor ·····································································4-116
Interior light ···································································4-88
Interior overview······························································2-2
Interlock system·····························································5-20
J
Jack and tools·································································6-13
Jump starting····································································6-6
I 6
K
Key positions ···································································5-4
Keys ·················································································4-2
L
Label
Air bag warning label··················································3-57
Tire sidewall labeling ··················································7-44
Tire specification and pressure label ·····························8-9
Vehicle certification label ··············································8-8
Latch system, see lower anchor system·························3-32
Light bulbs ·····································································7-63
Lighting··········································································4-81
Battery saver function··················································4-81
Headlight escort function ············································4-81
Headlight leveling device ············································4-81
Lower anchor system·····················································3-32
Lubricants and capacities·················································8-6
Lumbar support ························································3-5, 3-7
Index
M
N
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ·············7-19
Maintenance services·····················································7-3
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ···············7-18
Normal maintenance schedule·······································7-8
Owner maintenance ·······················································7-5
Scheduled maintenance service·····································7-7
Tire maintenance ·························································7-44
Maintenance services·······················································7-3
Manual climate control system······································4-92
Air conditioning ··························································4-97
Climate control air filter ··············································4-99
Heating and air conditioning ·······································4-93
Manual transaxle····························································5-12
Memory fuse··································································7-54
Mirrors ···········································································4-37
Day/night rearview mirror···········································4-39
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with homelink system
and compass ································································4-39
Inside rearview mirror ·················································4-39
Outside rearview mirror ··············································4-46
Moonroof, see panorama sunroof··································4-30
Multi fuse·······································································7-56
Neck restraints, see headrest ··································3-8, 3-13
O
Occupant detection system ············································3-40
Odometer ·······································································4-52
Oil (Engine) ···································································7-22
Online factory authorized manuals································8-14
Outside rearview mirror·················································4-46
Overheats ·········································································6-7
Owner maintenance ·························································7-5
P
Paddle shifter ·································································5-19
Panorama sunroof ··························································4-30
Parking brake ·································································5-22
Parking brake inspect·····················································7-28
Passenger's front air bag ················································3-45
Power brakes··································································5-21
Power outlet ·································································4-116
Power window lock button ············································4-24
Pre-tensioner seat belt····················································3-22
Push starting·····································································6-6
I 7
Index
R
Rear parking assist system·············································4-76
Rear seat·········································································3-13
Rearview camera····························································4-79
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ··················7-39
Recommended lubricants and capacities·························8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number ····························8-7
Remote keyless entry·······················································4-5
Replacement light bulb ··················································7-64
Reporting safety defects ················································8-13
Road warning···································································6-2
Rocking the vehicle ·······················································5-39
S
Scheduled maintenance service ·······································7-7
Normal maintenance schedule·······································7-8
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ···············7-18
Seat belts········································································3-17
Driver's 3-point system with evergency locking
retractor ····································································3-19
Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor ··································3-21
Pre-tensioner seat belt ·················································3-22
Seat belt warning ·························································3-18
Seat warmer····························································3-9, 3-16
Seatback pocket ·····························································3-12
I 8
Seats ·················································································3-2
Armrest ········································································3-14
Headrest································································3-8, 3-13
Folding the rear seat ····················································3-15
Front seat adjustment - manual ·····································3-4
Front seat adjustment - power ·······································3-6
Lumbar support ······················································3-5, 3-7
Rear seat ······································································3-13
Seatback pocket ···························································3-12
Climate control seat·····················································3-11
Seat warmer ···································································3-9
Shift lock system ···························································5-19
Side impact air bag ························································3-48
Smart key ·········································································4-3
Smooth cornering···························································5-40
Snow tires ······································································5-43
Spare tire
Compact spare tire·······················································6-19
Compact spare tire replacement ··································7-43
Removing and storing the spare tire····························6-14
Special driving conditions ·············································5-39
Driving at night ···························································5-40
Driving in flooded areas ··············································5-41
Driving in the rain ·······················································5-41
Hazardous driving conditions······································5-39
Highway driving ··························································5-42
Rocking the vehicle ·····················································5-39
Smooth cornering ························································5-40
Index
Speedometer···································································4-50
Sports mode ···································································5-17
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ··················6-3
Starting the engine··················································5-9, 5-10
Steering wheel ·······························································4-36
Horn ·············································································4-37
Electric power steering ················································4-36
Tilt steering··································································4-37
Steering wheel audio control ·······································4-120
Storage compartment ···················································4-113
Center console storage···············································4-113
Glove box ··································································4-113
Cool box ····································································4-114
Sunglass holder··························································4-114
Sunglass holder····························································4-114
Sunroof, see panorama sunroof ·····································4-30
Sunvisor ·······································································4-116
T
Tachometer·····································································4-50
Tether anchor system ·····················································3-31
Theft-alarm system ························································4-10
Tilt steering ····································································4-37
Tire chains······································································5-44
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ·······················6-8
Tire specification and pressure label ·······························8-9
Tires and wheels ····························································7-39
Checking tire inflation pressure ··································7-40
Compact spare tire replacement ··································7-43
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ················7-39
Tire care·······································································7-39
Tire maintenance ·························································7-44
Tire replacement ··························································7-44
Tire rotation ·································································7-41
Tire sidewall labeling ··················································7-44
Tire traction ·································································7-44
Wheel alignment and tire balance ·······························7-42
Wheel replacement ······················································7-43
Tires and wheels ······························································8-4
Tire mobility kit ·····························································6-21
Towing ···········································································6-27
Transaxle
Automatic transaxle·····················································5-15
Manual transaxle ·························································5-12
Trip computer ································································4-53
Trunk··············································································4-18
V
Vehicle break-in process ··················································1-4
Vehicle certification label ················································8-8
Vehicle data collection and event data
recorders (EDR)·····························································1-5
Vehicle identification number (VIN)·······························8-8
I 9
Index
Vehicle load limit···························································5-47
Certification label ························································5-50
Vehicle option ································································4-58
Vehicle stability management········································5-30
Vehicle weight ·······························································5-52
Base curb weight ·························································5-52
Cargo weight ·······························································5-52
GAW (Gross axle weight) ···········································5-52
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) ······························5-52
GVW (Gross vehicle weight) ······································5-52
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)·························5-52
W
Warnings and indicators ················································4-60
Washer fluid···································································7-27
Weight ············································································5-52
Base curb weight ·························································5-52
Cargo weight ·······························································5-52
GAW (Gross axle weight) ···········································5-52
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) ······························5-52
GVW (Gross vehicle weight) ······································5-52
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)·························5-52
Welcome system ····························································4-80
Wheel alignment and tire balance ·································7-42
Wheel replacement ························································7-44
I 10
Windows ········································································4-21
Auto down window ·····················································4-23
Auto up/down window ················································4-23
Power window lock button ··········································4-24
Windshield defrosting and defogging··························4-109
Defogging logic ·························································4-111
Winter driving ································································5-43
Snow tires ····································································5-43
Tire chains ···································································5-44
Wiper blades ··································································7-33
Wipers and washers ·······················································4-85
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement